ActiveHybrid 3
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
© 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/13, 07 13 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 228.
6 Notes
At a glance
14 Cockpit
18 iDrive
26 Voice activation system
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
31 BMW ActiveHybrid
Controls
36 Opening and closing
51 Adjusting
61 Transporting children safely
65 Driving
77 Displays
92 Lamps
97 Safety
118 Driving stability control systems
123 Driving comfort
146 Climate control
152 Interior equipment
160 Storage compartments
Driving tips
166 Things to remember when driving
171 Loading
174 Saving fuel
Mobility
182 Refueling
184 Fuel
185 Wheels and tires
192 Engine compartment
194 Engine oil
197 Coolant
198 Maintenance
200 Replacing components
211 Breakdown assistance
217 Care
Reference
224 Technical data
228 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Notes
The hybrid system of your
BMW
Your BMW is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to the
combustion engine, your vehicle features a
high-voltage system that consists of an elec‐
tric motor and a high-voltage battery among
other things.
This combination permits a particularly effi‐
cient fuel utilization.
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication and the short commands of the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐
arate user's manual, which is also included
with the onboard literature.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the ve‐
hicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Indicate, on certain parts or assemblies, that
incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or
high-voltage components results in the risk of
fatal injury from electric shock.
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Seite 6
Notes
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment
is also described and illustrated that is not
available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the
selected optional equipment or the country-
specific variants.
This also applies for safety-related functions
and systems.
For options and equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐
plementary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐
trations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair
methods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐
chase accessories tested and approved by
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐
ously acquire the assurance that they have
been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure op‐
timum performance when installed on your ve‐
hicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free
from defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and acces‐
sories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot
test every product made by other manufactur‐
ers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely
and without risk to either the vehicle, its opera‐
tion, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts,
BMW Accessories and other products ap‐
proved by BMW, together with professional
advice on using these items, are available from
all BMW centers. Installation and operation of
non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
placement, or repair of the emission control
devices and systems may be performed by any
automotive repair establishment or individual
using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Seite 7
Notes
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
documents the state of a component, a mod‐
ule, a system or the environment:
▷ Operating states of system components,
fill levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐
gagement of stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
Seite 8
Notes
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by the service personnel, in‐
cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐
nostic tools. You can obtain further information
there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected,
the information in the fault memory is deleted
or overwritten on a continuous basis.
When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐
ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐
ciate this technical data with individuals if it is
combined with other information, e.g., an acci‐
dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit‐
ness accounts — possibly with the assistance
of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle
data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
Seite 9
Notes
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 10
Notes
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Seite 11
Notes
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblinds 49
2 Rear window safety switch 48
3 Power windows 47
4 Exterior mirror operation 58
5 Glove compartment on the driver's
side 160
Driver assistance systems
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 113
Intelligent Safety 105
Collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function 106.
Lane departure warning 112
6 Lamps
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Front fog lamps 95
Parking lamps 92
Low beams 92
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 93
Daytime running lights 93
Adaptive Light Control 93
High-beam Assistant 94
Instrument lighting 95
7 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 70
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher 70
High-beam Assistant 94
Roadside parking lamps 93
Computer 88
8 Steering wheel buttons, left
Store speed 129
Resume speed 131
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing 130
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐
terrupting 123
Reduce distance 125
Increase distance 125
Cruise control rocker switch 130, 124
9 Instrument cluster 77
10 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation 26
Telephone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication
Thumbwheel for selection lists 87
11 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 71
Rain sensor 71
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps 72
12 Starting/stopping the engine,
switching drive readiness modes
and the ignition on/off 65
13 Horn
14 Steering wheel heating 60
15 Adjust steering wheel 60
16 Unlock hood 193
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
All around the center console
1 Headliner 17
2 Control Display 18
3 Ventilation 149
4 Hazard warning system 211
Central locking system 39
5 Glove compartment 160
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication
7 Climate control 146
8 Controller with buttons 18
9 Parking brake 69
10 PDC Park Distance Control 131
Rearview camera 134
Parking assistant 140
Surround View 134
11 Driving Dynamics Control 120
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 118
12 Automatic transmission selector
lever 73
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐
tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be
operated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad
The buttons can be used to open the me‐
nus directly. The controller can be used to
select menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Hints
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1.
Turn.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the but‐
ton
Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
Select menu items and create settings.
1.
Turn.
2. Press.
3. Move in two directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the but‐
ton
Function
MENU Open the main menu.
Audio Open audio menu last lis‐
tened to, switch between au‐
dio menus.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Press the but‐
ton
Function
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previ‐
ous panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐
ous display.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens
with the panel that was last selected in that
menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
1. "Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": letters and numbers, enter‐
ing.
▷ "Map": operating the interactive map.
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
▷ "Audio feedback": the entered letters
and numbers are announced.
Entering letters and numbers
The entry of the letters requires some practice
at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to
the following:
▷ For the entry of large/small letters and
numbers, first convert via iDrive to the cor‐
responding Input mode, refer to page 24.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter accompanying signs, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
Operating the interactive map
The interactive map in the navigation system
can be moved via the touchpad.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Function Controls
Interactive map. Slide in the correspond‐
ing direction.
Enlarge/shrink in‐
teractive map.
Drag the display inwards
or outwards with the fin‐
gers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Changing settings
Settings on the control display, such as the
volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do
this slide to the left or right accordingly.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter the PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface/mobile phone
audio interface.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched
off.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Without navigation system and
telephone
Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
▷ To display short information: touch the
button.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Move the controller up.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the
entry for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can
be entered using the spelling of language
available on the Control Display.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated by spoken
commands via the voice activation system.
The system prompts you to make your en‐
tries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated
using the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 90.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function in this case via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on which
menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Short commands exist for many functions.
Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can
also be selected via the voice activation sys‐
tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they
are displayed in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐
played, the commands for the settings are
read out loud.
Seite 26
At a glance Voice activation system
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, nearly
irrespective of which menu item is currently
selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication Owner's Manual.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant commands for them are an‐
nounced.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
Example: playing back a CD
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D‹
5. ›C D drive‹
6. ›Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Via short command
Playback of the CD can also be started via a
short command.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D drive track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use
the standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the
announcements from the system are issued in
an abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button while giving an in‐
struction until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 211, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 28
At a glance Voice activation system
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐
bed therein.
Components of the integrated
Owner's Manual
The integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or access possibilities.
Quick Reference Guide
Located in the Quick Reference is important
information for the operation of the vehicle, the
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
can also be displayed during driving.
Search by pictures
Information and descriptions based on illustra‐
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is
needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
Select components
1.
Press the button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to leaf from page to page.
Leaf back.
Leaf forward.
Seite 29
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be opened di‐
rectly.
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
1.
Press the button or move the control‐
ler to the right repeatedly until the
"Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1. Press the button or move the control‐
ler to the right repeatedly until the
"Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press the button again to return to
the function displayed last.
5.
Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 30
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
BMW ActiveHybrid
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Hybrid system
At a glance
1 Combustion engine
2 Electric motor
3 Control-system electronics
4 High-voltage cables (orange)
5 High-voltage battery
6 Auxiliary battery, combustion engine
The concept
The hybrid system makes it possible to opti‐
mize fuel consumption and driving characteris‐
tics.
An electric motor assists the combustion en‐
gine. In certain driving situations, the vehicle
can also be driven using only electric power,
thereby reducing fuel consumption.
In addition to this, the electric motor acts like
an alternator: during braking and coasting, it
converts the vehicle's kinetic energy into elec‐
tricity. The current is stored in the high-voltage
battery and is used to drive the electric motor.
The hybrid system combines the following
functions:
▷ Acceleration boost: ASSIST and eBOOST.
▷ Electric driving: eDRIVE.
▷ Automatic stopping of the combustion en‐
gine during coasting: coasting.
▷ Driving with the combustion engine: DRIVE
▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE.
▷ Automatic engine start-stop function.
▷ Auxiliary functions of the automatic climate
control.
▷ Adapting to the course of the road.
Functions
Electric driving: eDRIVE
Under certain conditions, refer to page 68,
the vehicle is powered only by the electric mo‐
tor.
Acceleration boost: ASSIST and
eBOOST
Driving off and accelerating require a lot of en‐
ergy.
To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuel
consumption, the electric motor boosts the
combustion engine. To do this, the electric
motor uses the energy saved in the high volt‐
age battery.
The ASSIST acceleration boost is automati‐
cally controlled and is not indicated in the in‐
strument cluster.
Seite 31
BMW ActiveHybrid At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Coasting
The engine is automatically switched off. This
driving condition is referred to as coasting, re‐
fer to page 68.
Driving with the combustion engine:
DRIVE
The combustion engine, refer to page 69,
provides the primary drive power to move the
vehicle. If necessary, the high-voltage battery
is charged at the same time.
The hybrid system always starts the combus‐
tion engine automatically.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
The high-voltage battery of the hybrid system
is charged through energy recovery.
The electric motor acts as a generator and
converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into
electric current.
Charging can take place in various situations:
▷ When the vehicle is coasting if the acceler‐
ator is not pressed.
▷ During vehicle braking.
When exerting gentle pressure on the brakes,
the vehicle is only braked by the electric motor.
When the brake pedal is depressed further, the
brake system is activated additionally. This is
why only part of the brake energy is used to
charge the high-voltage battery when exerting
firm pressure on the brake.
Foresighted driving and the early reduction of
speed are important to make full use of the hy‐
brid characteristics of your vehicle.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function
The Auto Start/Stop function, refer to
page 67, switches the combustion engine off
when coasting, braking and while the vehicle is
stopped. Convenience functions such as the
automatic climate control are supplied by the
high-voltage battery and can remain switched
on.
Auxiliary functions of the automatic
climate control
The hybrid system makes it possible to oper‐
ate the automatic climate control even with the
combustion engine switched off. In this way,
the interior of the vehicle can be cooled for ex‐
ample during a break in the journey by residual
cooling or even before the trip by auxiliary air
conditioning.
▷ Residual cooling, refer to page 150.
▷ Auxiliary air conditioning, refer to
page 150
Adapting to the course of the road
When destination guidance is active, the hy‐
brid system uses the navigation data. This
makes it possible to switch off the combustion
engine upon reaching the destination zone
even before reaching the destination.
Pay attention to the notes in Adapting to the
course of the road, refer to page 84.
Display
The displays of the hybrid system, refer to
page 82, provide information about the cur‐
rent state of hybrid operation and show the
system activity in a chart.
Energy-saving driving
To save energy while driving, read the follow‐
ing information:
▷ Saving fuel, refer to page 174
▷ Using the hybrid system efficiently, refer to
page 166
▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 175.
Safety information
Read the information on Safety of the hybrid
system, refer to page 215.
Seite 32
At a glance BMW ActiveHybrid
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Seite 33
BMW ActiveHybrid At a glance
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the trunk lid
4 Panic mode in alarm system, auxiliary air
conditioning
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro‐
file, refer to page 37.
Information on the required maintenance is
stored in the remote control as well. Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 198
Integrated key
Press the button on the back of the remote
control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
The front passenger glove compartment con‐
tains a switch for separately securing the trunk
lid, refer to page 43.
Replacing the battery
1.
Take the integrated key out of the remote
control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment; see arrow 2.
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling
center or to your service center.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Emergency detection of remote
control
It is also possible to switch on the ignition or
activate engine readiness in situations such as
the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐
mote control by external sources.
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by mo‐
bile devices in close proximity to the re‐
mote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine or activate engine readiness.
Starting the engine or activating
engine readiness with emergency
detection of the remote control
Automatic transmission: if a corresponding
Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
mote control, as shown, against the marked
area on the steering column and press the
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
pressing the brake.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated.
▷ The remote control used is detected when
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐
file is called up.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone
else with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three
Personal Profiles and one guest profile.
Transmitting the settings
Your personal settings can be taken with you
to another vehicle equipped with the Personal
Profile function. For more information, contact
your service center.
The settings are transmitted as follows:
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
▷ Via the USB interface for data transfer.
▷ BMW Online.
Profile management
Opening the profiles
A different profile can be called up than the
one associated with the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
Called up profile is assigned to the remote
control being used at the time.
Renaming profiles
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile and the
saved contacts can be exported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop for example.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile can be used to make individ‐
ual settings without affecting the three Per‐
sonal Profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Guest".
4. Create the settings.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start for selecting the desired profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
▷ Collision warning: warning time.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to
last.
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control: sport program
▷ Driver's seat position: automatically re‐
trieved after unlocking.
▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐
ment.
▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness,
position and rotation of the display.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐
ting.
▷ Tone: tone settings.
▷ Automatic climate control/Automatic cli‐
mate control with enhanced features: set‐
tings.
▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice
output on/off.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the
signal tone volume.
▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to
last, special settings.
▷ Rearview camera: selection of functions
and type of display.
▷ Side View: selection of the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display.
▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/
off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting,
on/off.
▷ Daytime running lights: current setting.
▷ Triple turn signal activation.
▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or
after starting to drive.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Trunk lid.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the door handles of the driver's and
front passenger doors.
The following takes place simultaneously
when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐
mote control:
▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,
the theft protection is activated/deacti‐
vated. Theft protection prevents the doors
from being unlocked using the lock but‐
tons or the door opener.
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 46, is
armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Opening and closing: from
the outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol.
The vehicle is unlocked.
Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy
lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
Create the settings, refer to page 45.
Convenient opening
The remote control can be used to simultane‐
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The windows and the glass sunroof open.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Locking
Press the button on the remote control.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on interior lamps and
courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Opening the trunk lid
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk
lid can only be opened using the remote con‐
trol if the vehicle has been unlocked.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
Malfunction
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery
may be discharged or there may be interfer‐
ence from external sources such as mobile
phones, metal objects, overhead power lines,
transmission towers, etc.
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at
the door lock using the integrated key.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door
lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
the remote control.
Only the driver's door is unlocked or locked via
the door lock.
Locking the doors and trunk lid
together
To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:
1.
With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐
ing the button for the central locking sys‐
tem in the interior.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door
from the outside.
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the
remote control.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un‐
lock the vehicle using the integrated key via
the door lock on the driver's door.
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Opening and closing: from
the inside
Locking and unlocking
Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the
doors and the trunk lid when the front doors
are closed, but they are not secured against
theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the arm‐
rest or
▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it.
Trunk lid
Opening
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Opening from the outside
▷ Press the button on the trunk lid.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
▷ With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens
with no-touch activation, refer to
page 44.
Opening from the inside
Push the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if
it is not locked.
Closing
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk
lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Locking separately
The trunk lid can be locked separately with the
switch in the front passenger glove compart‐
ment.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from
the central locking system.
If the glove compartment on the front passen‐
ger side is locked, the trunk lid cannot be
opened.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
using valet service. The infrared remote con‐
trol can be handed out without the key.
Emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
▷ Open trunk lid with no-touch activation.
▷ Start the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing
the buttons of the remote control or Comfort
Access.
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Convenient closing
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
with the finger and hold it down.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof are closed.
Monitor the closing process
Monitor the closing process to ensure
that no one becomes trapped.◀
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press the button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.
This corresponds to pressing the but‐
ton on the remote control.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Opening trunk lid with no-touch
activation
With Comfort Access, the trunk lid can be
opened with no-touch activation using the re‐
mote control you are carrying.
A sensor detects a directed foot motion in the
center of the area at the rear of the car and the
trunk lid opens.
Foot movement to be carried out
Do not touch vehicle
With the foot motion, make sure there is
steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;
otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from
hot exhaust system parts.◀
1.
Position in the center behind the vehicle.
Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
2. Move foot in the direction of travel under‐
neath the bumper and immediately back.
Opening
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes.
Preventing inadvertent opening
In situations where the trunk lid should is
not to be opened with no-touch activation, en‐
sure that the remote control is located beyond
the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m
from the rear of the car.
Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐
vertently, for example by an unintentional or
misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from external sour‐
ces such as mobile phones, metal objects,
overhead power lines, transmission towers,
etc.
In this case, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
If there is a malfunction, open the trunk lid with
the remote control button or with the button on
the trunk lid.
Adjusting
Unlocking
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or
the country-specific variant, you can set
whether the doors are also unlocked with the
button on the remote control.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob‐
jects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
ory is pressed.
Activating the setting
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Last seat position autom."
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk
lid.
▷ Movements in the vehicle.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the
car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
cess at the door lock, the alarm system is
armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door
lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
the remote control.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with
no-touch activation, refer to page 44.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
monitored again if the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk
lid can only be opened using the remote con‐
trol if the vehicle was unlocked first.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol.
▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying
the remote control with you, pull on the
driver side or front passenger side door
handle.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐
jure themselves.◀
Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening, refer to page 40, via the
remote control.
Closing
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient closing, refer to page 44, with
Comfort Access.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as
a window closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the
range of movement of the windows; otherwise,
the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Safety switch
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for example, from
opening and closing the rear windows using
the switches in the rear.
Seite 48
Controls Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Switching on and off
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transport‐
ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
result if the windows are closed without super‐
vision.◀
Roller sunblinds
Roller sunblind for rear window
General information
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind for the rear window after having activated
it a number of times in a row, the system is
blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐
ing. Let the system cool.
The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot
be moved at low interior temperatures.
Extending or retracting roller blind for
rear window
Press the button.
Roller sunblinds for the rear side
windows
Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook
it onto the bracket.
Do not open the window while the roller
sunblind is raised.
Do not open the window while the roller sun‐
blind is raised; otherwise, there is a risk of
damage at high speeds that may result in per‐
sonal injury.◀
Glass sunroof, powered
General information
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
selves.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch upward briefly.
▷ Closed roof is tilted open.
▷ The opened roof closes until
it is in its tilted position. The
sliding visor stays com‐
pletely open.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
▷ Slide switch back to the re‐
sistance point and hold.
Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor open together as long as
the switch is held down.
▷ Press switch back past the resistance
point.
Seite 49
Opening and closing Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The glass sunroof and sliding visor open
automatically. Pressing the switch again
stops the opening motion.
Analogously, the glass sunroof is closed by
sliding the switch forward.
The sliding visor remains open and can be
closed by hand.
Convenient operation, refer to page 40, via the
remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 44, with
Comfort Access.
Comfort position
Stops the roof in the comfort position if the
roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise
in the passenger compartment.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the switch.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check
that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise,
the closing action may not be interrupted in
certain extreme situations, such as when thin
objects are present.◀
Closing from the open position
without pinch protection
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1.
Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold.
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
opens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection.
Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the roof can only be operated
to a limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the roof closes without
pinch protection.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the sunroof is
completely closed.
▷ The roof closes without pinch protection.
Seite 50
Controls Opening and closing
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 54.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 55.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 97.
Seats
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline
the backrest on the front passenger side too
far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of
slipping under the safety belt in the event of an
accident. This would eliminate the protection
normally provided by the belt.◀
Manually adjustable seats
At a glance
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly to make sure it engages
properly.
Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Height
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
At a glance
1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the remote control currently in use. When
the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control,
the position is automatically retrieved if the
function, refer to page 46, is activated for this
purpose.
Adjustments in detail
1.
Forward/back.
Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
2. Height.
3. Seat tilt.
4. Backrest tilt.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Front seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem‐
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 175, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Rear seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem‐
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 175, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Number of safety belts
Your vehicle has been fitted with five safety
belts for the safety of you and your passen‐
gers. However, they can only offer protection
when adjusted correctly.
Hints
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
sengers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear seat belt buckle is solely
intended for the center passenger.
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal
impact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck,
rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or
breakable objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
1.
Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up
and a signal sounds. Make sure that
the safety belts are positioned cor‐
rectly. The safety belt reminder is active at
speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can
also be activated if objects are placed on the
front passenger seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Head restraints in the front
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
Seite 55
Adjusting Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Tilt
Three different tilt positions are available.
▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐
straint forward, arrow 1.
▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head
restraint folds as far back as possible.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Pull the head restraint upward as far as
possible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Seite 56
Controls Adjusting
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
The center head restraint cannot be adjusted
in elevation.
Folding down head restraints
Extending/retracting head restraint
Only fold down head restraint if no pas‐
sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted
headrests again if passengers are being car‐
ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased
risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀
▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint.
▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Pull the head restraint upward as far as
possible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Seat and mirror memory
General information
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror
positions can be stored and retrieved for each
remote control. Settings for the backrest width
and lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
Seite 57
Adjusting Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
3.
Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the
seat or steering wheel could result in an acci‐
dent.◀
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1.
Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored
seat positions is deactivated to save battery
power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
At a glance
1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
of an accident.◀
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
mirror setting is stored for the remote control
in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if the setting for this function is active.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed.
Seite 58
Controls Adjusting
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Saving positions
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 57
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the
curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐
ing, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out
Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before washing the car in an automatic
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or
with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could
be damaged, depending on the width of the
vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
med. Photocells are used for control in the In‐
terior rear view mirror, refer to page 59.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
The concept
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Seite 59
Adjusting Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 60
Controls Adjusting
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐
vided in accordance with the age, weight and
size of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to
their age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint fixing system in the front passenger
seat, make sure that the front, knee and side
airbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐
vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐
ger side airbags, refer to page 99.
Note
Deactivated front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint
fixing systems
Before mounting
Before mounting child restraint fixing systems,
ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked.
Hints
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
Lock the rear seat backrests in position
Before installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the rear seat backrests are
locked; otherwise, the protective effect is not
guaranteed and there is an increased risk of in‐
jury for the child in the event of an accident.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
Seite 61
Transporting children safely Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 99.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest
position to obtain the best possible position for
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the
event of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height af‐
ter this.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint fixing system in the front pas‐
senger seat, open the backrest width com‐
pletely. Do not change the backrest width
again and do not call up a memory position.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the back‐
rest width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise,
the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system
with the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐
dren.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
fixing systems, observe the operating and
safety information from the system manufac‐
turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be
reduced.◀
Seite 62
Controls Transporting children safely
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restr- ained by the internal harnesses.
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
fixing system is resting snugly against the
backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection
offered may be reduced.◀
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child
restraint fixing system.
Position
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated in the gap between the seat and back‐
rest.
With a through-loading system:
Position
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated behind the indicated covers.
Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing
systems
1.
Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
fer to the user's manual of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are
two outer or three mounting points for child re‐
straint fixing systems with a tether strap.
Seite 63
Transporting children safely Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Note
Mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐
per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix‐
ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap
is not routed over the head restraints or sharp
edges and is free of twisting on its way to the
upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐
not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in an accident.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 48.
Seite 64
Controls Transporting children safely
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Start/Stop button, drive
readiness states
The concept
The following ready states can
be attained by pressing the
Start/Stop button:
▷ Radio ready state on/off.
▷ Ignition on/off.
▷ Activating/deactivating drive readiness.
To activate drive readiness, press the brake
pedal.
Switching radio ready state on/off
The radio ready state is activated by pressing
the Start/Stop button in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ When the engine is running.
▷ When drive readiness is activated.
▷ When the engine is switched off automati‐
cally using the Auto Start/Stop function
and the brake is not applied.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button and do not press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths
of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations:
▷ When locking the vehicle, if the low beams
are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Note
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio ready state when the
door is opened if the lights are switched off or
the daytime running lights are switched on.
Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again and do not
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Seite 65
Driving Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition
is not switched off accidentally.◀
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are activated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available
when the low beams are switched off.
▷ When opening and closing the driver door,
if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if
the driver's door is open and the low
beams are switched off.
When the ignition is switched off, by opening
or closing the driver's door and unbuckling the
driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains
active.
Drive readiness
When drive readiness is activated, the vehicle
is operational. Activated drive readiness is the
equivalent of a running engine in conventional
vehicles. Deactivated engine readiness is
equivalent to switching the ignition off.
Drive readiness in detail
The concept
The following are the different drive readiness
variants:
▷ Electric drive readiness, Silent Start, refer
to page 66
The vehicle is powered by the electric mo‐
tor.
▷ Starting the combustion engine, refer to
page 67
The vehicle is powered by the combustion
engine.
Hints
Do not leave the vehicle unattended
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
drive readiness active; otherwise, it presents a
potential source of danger.◀
Awareness of vehicle reduced when
driven in electric mode
When driving in electric mode, note that due to
the lack of engine noise pedestrians and other
road users will not be as aware of the vehicle
as they usually would with a conventional en‐
gine. For instance, pay particular attention
when maneuvering into and out of a parking
space.◀
Activating drive readiness
1.
Close the driver's door.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Drive readiness is activated:
▷ Electric drive readiness, Silent Start or
▷ Starting the combustion engine.
Electric drive readiness, Silent Start
The vehicle is ready for driving without starting
the combustion engine.
Silent Start is possible after activating radio
ready state if the conditions for electric driving,
refer to page 68, have been met.
Display
READY indicates drive readi‐
ness.
Seite 66
Controls Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Starting the combustion engine
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless but highly toxic
gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of
danger.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐
mission in position P or neutral to prevent the
vehicle from moving.◀
Repeated starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to
start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several
times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel
is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing
a risk of overheating and damage to the cata‐
lytic converter.◀
The combustion engine is started with Acti‐
vate drive, refer to page 66, readiness under
the following conditions:
▷ The drive system is not at operating tem‐
perature.
▷ The temperature of the hybrid system is
too high.
▷ The high-voltage battery has an insuffi‐
cient charge.
Driving away
1.
Activate drive readiness.
2. Select transmission position D, M/S or R.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Drive away.
Deactivating drive readiness
After stopping the vehicle:
1. Select transmission position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake.
After parking the vehicle, you may hear noises
due to operation of the hybrid system, such as
for cooling of the high-voltage battery.
Before driving into a car wash
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a
car wash, pay attention to the information re‐
garding Washing in automatic car washes, re‐
fer to page 217.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function
The concept
The automatic engine start-stop function
helps save fuel. The system switches off the
combustion engine when conditions for elec‐
tric driving, refer to page 68, have been met.
The ignition or drive readiness remains
switched on.
READY appears on the tachometer. If neces‐
sary, the combustion engine starts automati‐
cally.
The combustion engine is also stopped during
the trip when coasting or braking. This driving
condition, in which the vehicle is traveling with‐
out power and energy recovery is not active, is
referred to as coasting, refer to page 68.
Note
The combustion engine is not switched off au‐
tomatically in the following situations:
▷ The combustion engine is not at operating
temperature.
▷ The transmission selector lever is in posi‐
tion M/S.
Seite 67
Driving Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
▷ High voltage battery is heavily discharged
or vehicle electrical system is heavily bur‐
dened.
▷ High stress of the automatic climate con‐
trol in the heating or cooling phase.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is being optimized for the cur‐
rent driving style, for instance during the
breaking-in period or after a service ap‐
pointment.
▷ The hybrid system is malfunctioning.
Safety mode
An automatically stopped combustion engine
does not start independently when:
▷ The driver's door is open and neither the
brake nor accelerator pedal are depressed.
▷ Unlocked hood.
The indicator lamps come on. The combustion
engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
button.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
1.
Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ The ignition is switched off.
▷ The radio ready state is activated.
▷ The Auto Start/Stop function is deacti‐
vated.
▷ Transmission position P is engaged
automatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches of the combustion engine automati‐
cally in the event of a malfunction. A message
is displayed. It is possible to continue driving.
Have the system checked.
Electric driving: eDRIVE
Requirements
Electric driving is possible:
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
▷ Transmission position D or R is engaged.
▷ The drive system is at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ The accelerator pedal is only slightly de‐
pressed.
▷ The driver's door is closed.
Possible up to speed of approx. 35 mph, ap‐
prox. 60 km/h.
In ECO PRO mode, a speed up to approx.
45 mph, approx. 75 km/h is possible.
Possible cruising range
Depending on the charge of the high-voltage
battery, the vehicle can be driven using electric
power constantly for up to 2-2.5 miles/3-4 km.
Coasting
The combustion engine is automatically stop‐
ped and disengaged from the drive train. This
driving condition is referred to as coasting.
Requirements
Coasting is possible:
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
▷ Transmission position D or R is engaged.
▷ The drive system is at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ The driver's door is closed.
▷ In COMFORT mode: when rolling at
speeds exceeding 35 mph, approx.
60 km/h or when braking at speeds above
50 mph, approx. 80 km/h.
▷ In ECO PRO: mode, when coasting, with‐
out operating the brake, at speeds below
100 mph, approx. 160 km/h.
Seite 68
Controls Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
After the coasting, the combustion or electric
motor restarts depending on the operating
state.
Driving with the combustion
engine: DRIVE
The combustion engine provides the primary
drive power to move the vehicle. If necessary,
the high-voltage battery is charged at the
same time.
Automatic start while driving
The combustion engine is automatically
started under the following conditions while
driving:
▷ Transmission position M/S is engaged.
▷ The speed for electric driving is exceeded
while accelerating.
▷ The high-voltage battery has an insuffi‐
cient charge.
▷ High voltage battery is completely
charged, e.g., when driving downhill.
▷ During intense accelerations or on inclines.
▷ System-related requirement for hybrid
components.
▷ Adapting to the course of the road when
destination guidance is activated.
Automatic parking while driving
When reducing speed, the combustion engine
is switched off when the conditions for electric
driving, refer to page 68, are met.
Assistance for the
combustion engine
The combustion engine provides the primary
drive power to move the vehicle.
The electric motor provides assistance as
needed with additional propulsive power.
ASSIST
During normal vehicle operation, the electric
motor assists the combustion engine, depend‐
ing on the situation.
eBOOST
Accelerating quickly, such as when passing,
requires the maximum available power from
the electric motor. To do this, apply extra force
to the accelerator pedal.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
The hybrid system makes it possible to con‐
vert kinetic energy into electrical power when
braking and coasting. This recovered energy
charges the high voltage battery. If necessary,
this stored electrical energy is output to the
electric motor.
The following conditions must be met to re‐
cover kinetic energy:
▷ The vehicle is moving.
▷ Transmission position D, M/S is engaged.
▷ The high-voltage battery is not fully
charged.
Energy recovery displays in the instrument
cluster, refer to page 83.
Parking brake
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Releasing
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
Hints
Use while driving
If on a rare occasion it is necessary to
use the parking brake while driving, do not use
excessive force when applying it. When using
it, keep the button on the lever depressed.
Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐
ing the parking brake may cause the rear
wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀
To prevent corrosion and braking control on
one side only, lightly apply the parking brake
periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions
permit.
The brake lamps will not light up if the parking
brake is engaged.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
Do not fold in the exterior mirror while
driving and when the turn signals/warning
flashers are working, or else the additional
flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon‐
ger be in the prescribed position and will be
difficult to see.◀
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Seite 70
Controls Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are
frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the
wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor
may be damaged.◀
No wiper operation on dry windshield
Do not use the windshield wipers if the
windshield is dry, as this may damage the
wiper blades or cause them to become worn
more quickly.◀
No wiper operation with wipers folded
away
Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded
away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be
damaged.◀
Switching on
Press the wiper levers up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when
the vehicle is stationary.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Intermittent operation or rain sensor
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Seite 71
Driving Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐
ing operation is started. At temperatures below
32 ℉/0 ℃, a wiping operation is not started.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise,
damage could be caused by undesired wiper
activation.◀
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.
Clean the windshield, headlamps
Pull the wiper lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle lights are
switched on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are switched on.◀
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are
ready for operation.
Seite 72
Controls Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
injury if it is used incorrectly.
Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐
tion.
Only keep it in the closed original container
and inaccessible to children.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐
centrate or the equivalent.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
turer's recommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
water; this could damage the wiper system.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can
result in clogging of the windshield washer
nozzles.
For the capacity, refer to technical data.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 65, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After deactivating drive readiness when the
vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to
page 65, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 65, and when position R
or D is engaged.
Seite 73
Driving Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐
gaged.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐
tion P of the automatic transmission is en‐
gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to
roll.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the
brake pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.◀
Engaging D, R and N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
its center position.
Press unlock button, in order to:
▷ Engage R.
▷ Shift out of P.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Sport program and manual mode
Activating the sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Seite 74
Controls Driving
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
EDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start
Stop function are deactivated. Coasting to a
standstill and braking phases will be used
more often to recover energy. The high voltage
battery will be charged more quickly.
Activating the M/S manual mode
1. Push the selector lever to the left out of
transmission position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.
Switching to manual mode
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Sport automatic transmission: prevent
automatic upshifting in M/S manual
mode
For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐
sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐
formed, at maximum engine speed for exam‐
ple, if one of the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
transmission temporarily switches to manual
mode.
If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys‐
tem switches back into automatic mode if the
selector lever is in transmission position D.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is dis‐
played, e.g.: P.
Seite 75
Driving Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Sport automatic transmission: launch
Control
The concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
Hints
Component wear
Do not use Launch Control too often;
otherwise, this may result in premature wear of
components due to the high stress placed on
the vehicle.◀
Did not use Launch Control during the break-
in, refer to page 166, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select with the
Driving Dynamics Control Sport+.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engaging the transmission position S
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press on the accelerator beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
A flag symbol appears in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
again.
Seite 76
Controls Driving
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Displays
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Instrument cluster
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 80
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps 78
4 Tachometer 80
5 Engine oil temperature 80
6 Current fuel consumption 84
7 Electronic displays 78
8 Display/reset miles 81
Seite 77
Displays Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features
1 Time 81
External temperature 81
Date 81
Selection list, e.g., radio 87
Speed limit detection 86
Computer 88
Miles/trip miles 81
Navigation display, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
2 Transmission display 75
ECO PRO 175
Hybrid displays 82
3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 78
Service requirements 84
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output
and a text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Seite 78
Controls Displays
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal.
Front fog lamps.
Rear fog lamp.
High beams.
High-beam Assistant.
Parking lamps, headlamp control.
Active Cruise Control.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise
Control: collision warning.
Speed limit, adjustable.
Cruise control.
Lane departure warning.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Trac‐
tion Control is activated.
Tire Pressure Monitor.
Flat Tire Monitor.
Symbol Function or system
Safety belts.
Airbag system.
Steering system.
Engine functions.
Parking brake.
Brake system.
In Canadian models
Parking brake.
Brake system.
ABS Antilock Brake System.
ABS Antilock Brake System in
Canadian models.
At least one Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed or is stored (sym‐
bol in display).
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
a fault or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
The supplementary text of urgent messages is
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Seite 79
Displays Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages that are displayed during
driving are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may
cause the display to vary.
US models: the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 182.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
middle or in the left half of
the temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. A Check Control message is
also displayed.
Seite 80
Controls Displays
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 197.
Odometer and trip odometer
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Display/reset miles
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
External temperature warning
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is the increased danger of ice.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on
roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and
shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐
creased risk of an accident.◀
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time for‐
mat, refer to page 90.
Date
The date is displayed in the
computer.
Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 90.
Range
After the reserve range is
reached:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when cornering quickly, operation of the
engine is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Displaying the cruising range
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The range is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Seite 81
Displays Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Displays of the hybrid
system
Displays in the instrument cluster
The concept
The following functions of the hybrid system
are displayed:
▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator.
▷ Electric driving: eDRIVE.
▷ Acceleration boost: eBOOST.
▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function: READY.
The display depends on the system's operat‐
ing condition.
Note
High voltage
Even if no bars are displayed in the bat‐
tery symbol, the hybrid system is still under
high voltage.◀
High-voltage battery charge indicator
When driving readiness is switched on in
COMFORT mode, displays the available
charge of the high-voltage battery with bars in
a battery symbol. If five bars are shown, the
high-voltage battery is fully charged.
During normal vehicle operation, the high-volt‐
age battery is charged up to approx. 80 %.
This ensures optimum energy recovery when
braking or driving downhill.
Electric driving: eDRIVE
When driving in COMFORT or ECO PRO
modes, the power output of the electric motor
is indicated by arrows on the instrument clus‐
ter.
Depending on the position of the accelerator
pedal, up to four arrows are displayed simulta‐
neously. The tachometer pointer stays on
READY.
If all four arrows are already displayed, the
combustion engine is switched on, for exam‐
ple, during accelerations or on uphill gradients.
Acceleration boost: eBOOST
When the electric motor is delivering maximum
output, eBOOST is displayed.
Seite 82
Controls Displays
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Energy recovery: CHARGE
The energy recovered is indicated in the in‐
strument cluster: in COMFORT mode by ar‐
rows and in ECO PRO mode by a bar below
the CHARGE display. The high voltage battery
is being charged.
Auto Start/Stop function: READY
READY indicates drive readi‐
ness.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying the hybrid system
utilization
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Hybrid"
3. "Hybrid usage"
Hybrid system utilization
Gray bars indicate the fuel consumption of the
combustion engine, arrow 1. Blue bars indicate
the percentage utilization of the functions of
the hybrid system, arrow 2.
One bar stands for one minute.
The combustion engine's average fuel con‐
sumption is indicated by a line above the bar
display and as a value to the right of the graph.
Displaying the energy flow
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Hybrid"
3.
"Energy flow"
Energy flow of the hybrid system
The following are displayed:
▷ Active components of the hybrid system.
▷ Direction of the energy flows:
Orange: energy flow of the combustion en‐
gine.
Blue: energy flow of the hybrid system
▷ Driving states:
eDrive.
Drive.
eBoost.
Charge.
▷ System requirements of the hybrid system,
for example, drive system not yet heated to
operating temperature.
▷ Driving requirement, e.g., transmission se‐
lector lever in the M/S position.
Seite 83
Displays Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Adapting to the course of the road
When the navigation system destination guid‐
ance is active, the hybrid system uses the navi‐
gation data. This makes it possible to switch
off the combustion engine upon reaching the
destination zone even before reaching the
destination. The vehicle is powered only by the
electric motor.
The symbol indicates that the vehicle will
switch off the combustion engine when it en‐
ters the destination zone.
Current fuel consumption
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driv‐
ing in an efficient and environ‐
mentally-friendly manner.
This display is available in the SPORT driving
mode.
Current consumption can be displayed in the
onboard computer, refer to page 88, in any
driving mode.
Service requirements
The concept
The driving distance or the time to the next
scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly af‐
ter the ignition is switched on.
The current service requirements can be read
out from the remote control by the service
specialist.
Display
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center
before a service due date.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
Display in the instrument cluster
with expanded scope.
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently re‐
quired.
The deadline for service or a
legally mandated inspection is
approaching.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
correctly.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Seite 84
Controls Displays
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center
before a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Service history
Perform maintenance work at the service cen‐
ter and have them recorded in the vehicle data.
The entries are like a service booklet of the
documentation of regular maintenance.
The entered maintenance work can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. Function is
available as soon as a maintenance operation
has been entered in the vehicle data.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Service history"
Performed maintenance operations are
displayed.
5. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
Green: maintenance was per‐
formed on schedule.
Yellow: maintenance was per‐
formed late.
Maintenance was not per‐
formed.
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear in the current driving situation.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and
the country-specific version of the vehicle, the
gear shift indicator is active in the manual
mode of the automatic transmission and in the
manual transmission.
Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Automatic transmission: displays
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is engaged.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Seite 85
Displays Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Speed limit detection with
No Passing Information
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
detected speed limit. The camera at the base
of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic
signs at the edge of the road as well as variable
overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra
symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also
detected and compared with vehicle interior
data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis‐
played depending on the situation. The system
takes into account the information stored in
the navigation system and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
No Passing Information
No Passing Information in the instrument clus‐
ter displays the beginnings and ends of no
passing zones detected by the camera. The
system accounts for only the beginnings and
ends of No Passing zones marked by signs.
No display is shown:
▷ In countries where No Passing zones are
primarily identified with road markings.
▷ On routes without signage.
▷ Where there are railroad crossings, high‐
way markings or other situations where no
signage is present, but passing would not
be permitted.
Hints
Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀
At a glance
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐
ment cluster via the onboard computer. No
Passing Information is displayed together with
the activated speed limit information.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.
Speed limit detection is not
available.
Seite 86
Controls Displays
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
No Passing Information
▷ Start of No Passing zone.
▷ End of No Passing zone.
▷ No Passing Information not
available.
No Passing Information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in the road net‐
work.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
The following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel and the display in the instru‐
ment cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
In addition, programs of the Driving Dynamics
Control are displayed.
Display
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
Activating a list and creating the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
Seite 87
Displays Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb‐
wheel.
Computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the on‐
board computer is shown in the
info display in the instrument
cluster.
Calling up information on the info
display
Press the onboard computer button on the
turn signal lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of
the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information
on the info display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐
play is inactive.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
▷ Charge state of the high-voltage battery as
a percentage.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
If there is only enough fuel left for less than
45 miles/80 km, the color of the display
changes.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period during which the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
onboard computer.
Seite 88
Controls Displays
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped do not enter into the
calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the computer button on the
turn signal lever.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer
to page 86, function.
Speed limit
Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at
least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Trip computer
The vehicle features two types of computer.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to
a standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the onboard computer or trip computer
on the Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Seite 89
Displays Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Sport displays
In the Control Display, the current system val‐
ues of hybrid operation for power and torque
can be displayed.
Displaying sport displays in the
Control Display
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Sport displays"
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
Seite 90
Controls Displays
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 27.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Assist system information
Display on the Control Display
Information on the Assist system can be dis‐
played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐
play.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driver assistance info"
Seite 91
Displays Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
At a glance
1 Rear fog lamps
2 Front fog lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive
Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel‐
come lamps, Daytime running lights
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam
Assistant
7 Instrument lighting
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
General information
Switch position: 0, ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 93.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlamp flasher is switched on after the igni‐
tion is switched off.
Setting the duration
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Seite 92
Controls Lamps
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are
switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐
nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐
ment in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually
under these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐
ning lights light up in position 0, or .
After the ignition is switched off, the parking
lamps light up in position .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐
tivate the daytime running lights.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, one of the two front fog lamps is
switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the
inside of the curve is better lighted.
Activating
Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
Seite 93
Lamps Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp
is active.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on
and off or suppresses the light in the areas that
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐
trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are switched on whenever the traf‐
fic situation allows. The driver can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams on and off
as usual.
Activating
The High-beam Assistant can be activated
when the low beams are switched on.
1.
Turn the light switch to or .
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever,
arrow.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams. Depend‐
ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the
areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,
the blue indicator light will stay on.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐
vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐
ton on the turn signal lever.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore,
manually switch off the high beams in situa‐
tions where this is required to avoid a safety
risk.◀
Seite 94
Controls Lamps
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 93, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lamps.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the
thumbwheel.
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
1 Interior lamps
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and
off
Press the button.
Seite 95
Lamps Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lamps.
When the interior lamps are switched off per‐
manently, the reading lamps cannot be
switched on.
Ambient light
Depending on the equipment, the lighting can
be adjusted in the interior for some lights.
Selecting color scheme
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select the desired setting.
If the color scheme of the line is selected and
the welcome lamps are activated, the welcome
lamps are displayed in the color of the line
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness
The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting but also independently of it.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 96
Controls Lamps
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Safety
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Seite 97
Safety Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not
cover with adhesive labels or coverings,
and do not attach holders such as for navi‐
gation instruments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
can occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explo‐
sives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
which could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
When the ignition is switch on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Seite 98
Controls Safety
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
When there is a malfunction, have the
airbag system checked immediately
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag
system checked immediately; otherwise, there
is a risk that the system does not function as
expected in the event of an accident despite
corresponding severity of the accident.◀
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated
accordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
the front passenger airbags may not function
properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions under Children on the front passen‐
ger seat.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐
vated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically recommended
by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty.
The airbags on the front
passenger side are not acti‐
vated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Seite 99
Safety Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, especially in the child seats that
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
manufactured. After installing a child seat,
make sure that the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
front passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front
passenger airbags are triggered depends on
the position of the driver's and front passenger
seats.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Move the respective seat forward all the
way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury
or damage to objects.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire pressure in the four
mounted tires. The system warns you if there
is a significant loss of pressure in one or more
tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
valves measure the tire pressure and tire tem‐
perature.
Hints
Tire damage due to external factors
Sudden tire damage caused by external
influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀
Pay attention to the other information and indi‐
cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 185, as well when using the system.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en‐
sured.
Reset the system again after each correction
of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire
or wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.
Seite 100
Controls Safety
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
the last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
for this may be:
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ Malfunction.
Carry out reset
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is
displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the tire inflation pressures set are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically during driving.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the reset resumes automati‐
cally.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire pressures before the last
reset.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 191, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a low inflation pressure is indicated,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In
that case, carry out a reset.
Seite 101
Safety Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐
tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec‐
tronics. In this case, have the electronics
checked at the next opportunity and have
them replaced if necessary.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In
that case, carry out a reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Required inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed.
Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out
a reset of the system.
In some cases, a wheel was changed without
having carried out a reset.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
reported even though the tire inflation pres‐
sures are correct.
The tire pressure depends on the temperature
of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g.,
due to driving or because of the heat of the
Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also.
The tire pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. This behavior may
cause a warning to be issued if temperatures
fall very sharply.
Seite 102
Controls Safety
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if neces‐
sary.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the disturbance, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter
and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
Seite 103
Safety Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla‐
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 191, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
inflation pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive
wheels, high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Seite 104
Controls Safety
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more of the
following systems, which can help to avoid an
imminent collision. These systems are active
automatically every time the engine is started
using the Start/Stop button:
▷ Collision warning, refer to page 106.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 110.
Note
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
Seite 105
Safety Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after each engine start via the start/
stop button.
Press the button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
Press the button: the systems are switched off.
The LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Collision warning
Depending on how the equipment is equipped,
the collision warning system consists of one of
the two systems:
▷ Collision warning with City Braking func‐
tion, refer to page 106;
▷ Collision warning with braking function, re‐
fer to page 108
Collision warning with City
Braking function
The concept
The system can help to prevent accidents. If
an accident cannot be prevented, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐
pendently.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
The system is controlled via a camera in the
base of the mirror.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
avoid false warnings.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these
warnings may vary depending on the current
driving situation.
Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐
vention occurs when appropriate.
Detection range
Vehicles are observed when they are traveling
in the same direction of movement if they are
Seite 106
Controls Safety
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
located within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
button.
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase braking and distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐
tervene. During the warning, the maximum
braking force is used, even with light pressure
on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk
of collision, the system can assist with a slight
braking intervention. The intervention can
bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle,
switch off the collision warning with braking
function to prevent undesired interventions.
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The system's detection capabilities are limited.
Seite 107
Safety Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
▷ If there is constant dimming because of
oncoming light, for example, from the sun
low in the sky.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this
may result in increased false warnings.
Collision warning with
braking function
The concept
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and also includes a
braking function.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in
conjunction with a camera.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
avoid false warnings.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time
of these warnings may vary depending on the
current driving situation.
Detection range
It responds to stationary or moving objects
that are within the detection range of the radar
system.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Seite 108
Controls Safety
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
button.
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
Display
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when
there is the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.
The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐
vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is
accompanied by a braking intervention.
The braking intervention is executed with lim‐
ited braking force and for a brief period only.
The intervention can bring the vehicle to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle,
switch off the collision warning with braking
function to prevent undesired interventions.
Display in the instrument cluster
The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
acoustically.
Warning stages
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Seite 109
Safety Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The system's detection capabilities are limited.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
▷ If there is constant dimming because of
oncoming light, for example, from the sun
low in the sky.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this
may result in increased false warnings.
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function
The concept
The system can help to prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
The system is controlled via the camera in the
base of the interior mirror.
General information
The system issues a warning with brightness
staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of
collision with pedestrians and assists with a
brake intervention shortly before a collision.
It responds to persons that are within the de‐
tection range of the system.
Detection range
The warning area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas.
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
Seite 110
Controls Safety
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Switching off
Press the button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
Press the button: the systems are switched off.
The LED lights up.
Warning with braking function
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
making an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐
tervene. During the warning, the maximum
braking force is used, even with light pressure
on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk
of collision, the system can assist with a slight
braking intervention. The intervention can
bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle,
switch off the pedestrian warning to prevent
undesired interventions.
Seite 111
Safety Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The detection capability of the camera is lim‐
ited.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians below a body size of approx.
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. Depending
on the country-specific version of the vehicle,
the speed is between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h. If the system is switched on
below this speed, a message appears in the in‐
strument cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the
course of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐
ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐
cle.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Lane departure warning
Seite 112
Controls Safety
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg‐
ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper
monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle
at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
Seite 113
Safety Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights
up dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Active Blind Spot Detection
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds
above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
Seite 114
Controls Safety
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Active Protection
General information
The Active Protection safety package consists
of systems that are independent of each other:
▷ Attentiveness assistant.
▷ PreCrash
▷ PostCrash
Attentiveness assistant
The concept
The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
notonous journeys, for example, on highways.
In this situation, it is recommended that the
driver take a break.
Note
Personal responsibility
The system cannot act as a substitute for
the personal assessment of one's physical
state and may not detect an increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐
Seite 115
Safety Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is
rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐
tected too late and an accident be caused as a
result.◀
Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system is trained
about the driver, so that increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for example, steer‐
ing behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for example, length of
trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering
quickly.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
PreCrash
The concept
With this system critical driving situations that
might result in an accident can be detected
above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In
these situations, preventative protection
measures are automatically undertaken to
minimize the risk in the event of an accident as
much as possible.
Critical driving situations may include:
▷ Full brake applications.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
If the vehicle includes the collision warning or
collision warning with braking feature, impend‐
ing collisions with vehicles driving ahead or
stopped in front of you can also be detected
within the system's range.
Note
Personal responsibility
The system cannot possibly serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
the traffic situation. The system may not al‐
ways detect critical situations reliably and in a
timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation
and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may
result.◀
Function
After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts
are automatically pretensioned once after the
vehicle is driven is away.
In critical driving situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as needed:
Seite 116
Controls Safety
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐
sioned.
▷ Automatic closing of the windows.
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front belts are loosened again. All
other systems can be restored to the desired
setting.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.
PostCrash
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐
tervention by the driver in certain situations.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐
hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also
interrupts automatic braking.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
Seite 117
Safety Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. This then reduces braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during full braking. This
system utilizes all of the benefits provided by
ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving
wheels when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐
ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine
speed and by applying brakes at individual
wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in bends.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Seite 118
Controls Driving stability control systems
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in
which forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward mo‐
mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐
lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐
ited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out.
Dynamic Damping Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort as required for the road surface and
driving style.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Dynamics Control, refer to page 120.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced control of the vehicle.
Variable sport steering
The variable sport steering increases the
steering angle of the front wheels at large
steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.
It also varies the force required to turn the
wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.
Seite 119
Driving stability control systems Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
This results in a sporty steering response. In
addition, it becomes easier to steer during
parking and maneuvering.
Driving Dynamics Control
The concept
The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to
adjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle.
Various programs can be selected for this pur‐
pose. The Driving Dynamics Control and the
DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate
a program.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Automatic program change
The system automatically switches to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.
DSC OFF
When DSC OFF, refer to page 118, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
TRACTION
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 119, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in bends.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and
adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐
bilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the instrument
cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights
up.
Automatic program change
When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension
and engine control for greater driving agility
with maximum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 120
Controls Driving stability control systems
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 121, the SPORT driving
mode can be set to individual specifications.
▷ Activating SPORT.
▷ "Configure SPORT"
▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure SPORT"
4. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the
SPORT driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 120.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 175, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Comfort functions and the engine controller
are adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed on the
Control Display.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode info"
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradi‐
ents. The parking brake is not required.
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
Seite 121
Driving stability control systems Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin
rolling back.◀
Seite 122
Controls Driving stability control systems
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function, ACC
The concept
This system can be used to select a desired
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads.
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
ahead of you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead
begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the
system is able to detect this within the given
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your
drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is
able to accelerate if operated accordingly.
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐
erated automatically and simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to
the desired speed.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
slopes if engine power is insufficient.
General information
When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is
also set to a driving style that saves on fuel
consumption.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her speed,
distance and driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Drive attentively, and react to the current
traffic events. Intervene actively when neces‐
sary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an
evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger
of an accident.◀
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press the
button
Function
System on/off, interrupt, refer
to page 124
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 124
Resume speed, refer to
page 126
Reduce distance, refer to
page 125
Increase distance, refer to
page 125
Rocker switch:
Change/maintain speed, refer
to page 124
Seite 123
Driving comfort Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐
ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐
try-specific variants.
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐
tection of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar
sensor.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up and the marking in the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or inter‐
rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering
and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
and distance are deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ When transmission position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is
activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened when the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without road edge line
markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐
rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the button.
Or:
Seite 124
Controls Driving comfort
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the instrument cluster, refer to page 126.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Changing, maintaining, and storing
the speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the
system is interrupted to maintain and store the
current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control
is switched on, if necessary.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
Speed differences
Large differences in speed relative to ve‐
hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐
sated by the system for example in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck.
▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves
into the wrong lane.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Distance
Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traf‐
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is
the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain
the prescribed safety distance.◀
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 126, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Seite 125
Driving comfort Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The selected distance, refer to page 126, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and
distance
While driving
Press the button with the system
switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
While standing
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
against rolling
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and apply the parking brake. Other‐
wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
The system brought the vehicle to a complete
standstill.
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐
dar sensor moves off.
▷ Marking in the speedometer turns orange:
no automatic driving away.
To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐
matically, press the accelerator briefly or
press the RES or SET button.
Rolling bars in the distance display indicate
that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection
range has moved off.
Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing
on the brake pedal and it is standing behind
another vehicle:
1. Press the button to call up a stored
desired speed.
2. Release the brake pedal.
3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press
the RES button or the rocker switch when
the vehicle ahead of you drives away.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
tem requirements for operation are currently
not met.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving
ahead of you is shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
Seite 126
Controls Driving comfort
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Distance display
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
Indicator/warning lamps
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his or her desired driving speed and style to
the traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for
operating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively assume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneuver.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
uation when using the system.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.
Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
pacity of the camera and the sensor, you
should be alert at all times so that you can in‐
tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane,
e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
of traffic congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road
users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Oncoming traffic.
Seite 127
Driving comfort Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
No warnings
A warning may not be issued when ap‐
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if necessary. You must react yourself;
otherwise, there is the danger of an accident
occurring.◀
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐
cle, you yourself must react, as the system
does not react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance.
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate
speed.
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not
be detected at all, or not until after a consider‐
able delay.
Seite 128
Controls Driving comfort
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
When approaching a curve, the system may
react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of
the vehicle by the system can be compensated
for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or
behind bumps in the road.
Radar sensor
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred during parking, for
example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐
stant speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐
cle and cause an accident.◀
General information
When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is
also set to a driving style that saves on fuel
consumption.
Seite 129
Driving comfort Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Controls
At a glance
Press the button Function
Interrupt system on/off
Store speed
Resume speed
Changing the speed
Switching on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or inter‐
rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if
necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting the system
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
Maintaining/storing the current speed
Press the button.
Or
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the speedometer, refer to page 131.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Changing/maintaining speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the
system is interrupted in order to maintain and
store the current speed.
Seite 130
Controls Driving comfort
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it there accelerates
or decelerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator. After the
rocker switch is released, the vehicle main‐
tains its final speed. Pressing the switch
beyond the resistance point causes the ve‐
hicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed
Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
tem requirements for operation are currently
not met.
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐
hind your vehicle are indicated with:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐
sors in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
Seite 131
Driving comfort Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
▷ By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects
located outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐
cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's
signal tone.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
PDC Park Distance Control
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control,
the rearview camera, refer to page 134, can be
switched on.
Switching on the rearview camera via
the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed. The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of
the object. For example, if an object is de‐
tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal
tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object be‐
comes, the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
Seite 132
Controls Driving comfort
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
If objects are located both in front of and be‐
hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐
nal is sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap‐
prox. 3 seconds:
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted,
refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are displayed on the Control
Display before a signal tone sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors red, green and yellow.
If the rearview camera image was selected last,
it again appears on the display. To switch to
PDC:
1.
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
System limits
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐
ous tone alternating between the front and
rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction
due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐
ger present, the system is again fully func‐
tional.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Seite 133
Driving comfort Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View
The concept
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 134
▷ Side View, refer to page 136.
▷ Top View, refer to page 138.
Backup camera
The concept
The backup camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Hints
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the backup
camera.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Rearview camera
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired
by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 220.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The backup camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Seite 134
Controls Driving comfort
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switching on the rearview camera via
the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed. The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐
played.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
age when in transmission position R.
▷ Help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering an‐
gle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
age.
▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
turning circle on a level road.
▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned.
Seite 135
Driving comfort Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Obstacle marking
General information
▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown
in the rearview camera image.
Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown.
Parking using pathway and turning
circle lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐
cle lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detected by the rearview camera.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
Seite 136
Controls Driving comfort
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.
Notes
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could
result from road users or objects located out‐
side the picture area of the Side View cam‐
eras.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Side View
Cameras
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐
ture the image.
The two camera lenses are located on the
sides of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 220.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show
the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Seite 137
Driving comfort Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Top View
The concept
Top View assists you in parking and maneu‐
vering. The area around the doors and the road
area around the vehicle are shown on the Con‐
trol Display for this purpose.
General information
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
backup camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the
cameras.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Top View
Cameras
The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
ings. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 220.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.
Seite 138
Controls Driving comfort
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Switching on the backup camera via
the iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in
the PDC display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
If the rearview camera image was selected last,
it again appears on the display when reverse
gear is selected. To switch to Top View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐
rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐
justed with the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Seite 139
Driving comfort Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Parking assistant
The concept
This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
lel to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information issued by the PDC and
the parking assistant and react accordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 131.
Hints
Personal responsibility
The parking assistant does not relieve
the driver of responsibility for the vehicle dur‐
ing the parking procedure.
Watch the parking space and parking proce‐
dure closely and intervene if necessary; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident.◀
Changes to the parking space
Changes to the parking space after it was
measured are not taken into account by the
system.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Transporting loads
Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐
cle may become damaged.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's
length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking procedure
▷ Closed doors.
▷ Parking brake released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set.
Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Parking assistant
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the wheel arches.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button
Press the button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate:
"Parking Assistant" Select the
symbol in the Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press the button.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
Display on the Control Display
Activating/deactivating the system
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: system status
The status is displayed with symbols.
Gray: parking space search.
Blue: the system is activated. A
suitable parking space was
found.
Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The parking procedure is active.
Steering control has been
seized.
Status of the parking space search
▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search.
▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.
The vehicle is parked in the parking space
if the parking procedure is active.
▷ No display: no parking space search.
With navigation system professional
or TV: status of the system
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
of the vehicle representation. Parking as‐
sistant is activated and search for parking
space active.
▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next
to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the
road as on the Control Display. When the
parking assistant is active, suitable parking
spaces are highlighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been seized.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forwards
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Check the traffic situation as well
Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐
cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐
ing assistant and PDC.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident.◀
1.
Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
vate it if necessary.
The status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
To achieve the best possible parking posi‐
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel
movement after the gear change when the
vehicle is stationary.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐
essary.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
▷ Press the button.
Seite 142
Controls Driving comfort
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the Control Display.
▷ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite
direction to the desired side for parking.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces
if necessary.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ If the trunk lid is open.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
arise.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Continuing
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if necessary.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display
to do this.
System limits
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ When towing a trailer.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When sensors are dirty or iced over.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the
parking space.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in
the following circumstances:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,
such as fences.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detected.
The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Seite 143
Driving comfort Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Head-up Display
The concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
In this way, the driver can get information with‐
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Switching on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Collision warning.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Pedestrian warning.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐
ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐
ing.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Adjusting the height
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Seite 144
Controls Driving comfort
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Setting the rotation
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield re‐
placed by a service center only.
Seite 145
Driving comfort Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Climate control
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 54
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program
4 Display
5 Maximum cooling
6 Temperature, right
7 Seat heating, right 54
8 Cooling function
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
10 Air distribution, right
11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
12 Air distribution, left
13 Rear window defroster
14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
Seite 146
Controls Climate control
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Climate control functions in detail
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the de‐
sired temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐
put, and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐
perature are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the windshield, side windows,
upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 147, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐
matic control of the air flow and air distribution
can be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body
region. The vents need to be open for this.
The air is cooled fastest when the engine is
running.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can be cooled
with the engine running or switched off.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
and – depending on the temperature setting –
warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 170, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
Seite 147
Climate control Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐
matically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow onto the wind‐
shield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐
ily.◀
Manual air distribution
Press the button repeatedly to select
a program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Air flow, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air flow,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Switching on
Press any button except
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 198, of your vehi‐
cle.
Seite 148
Controls Climate control
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 3.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot
from the sun.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐
essary.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing two preset switch-on times. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the switch-on time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
Seite 149
Climate control Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti‐
vated.
Residual cooling
When the automatic climate control has re‐
duced the interior temperature, this tempera‐
ture can also be maintained after the combus‐
tion engine has been switched off. This
function can be activated up to 15 minutes af‐
ter the engine is switched off and for a maxi‐
mum period of 6 minutes.
Functional requirement
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
▷ External temperature at least ap‐
prox. 59 ℉/15 ℃.
Switching on
1.
Switch off the ignition.
2.
Press the right side of the button
on the driver's side.
The symbol appears on the automatic cli‐
mate Control Display.
The interior temperature, air volume and air
distribution can be adjusted with the radio
ready state switched on.
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left
side of the button on the driver's side.
The symbol on the automatic climate Con‐
trol Display disappears.
Auxiliary air conditioning
The concept
To cool the heated passenger compartment
immediately before starting to drive, the auto‐
matic climate control can be activated via a re‐
mote control.
The automatic climate control reduces the in‐
terior temperature with high cooling power for
approx. two minutes.
The auxiliary air conditioning can be switched
on or off using the remote control.
Remote control
The concept
If the high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged, the auxiliary air conditioning can be
activated for two minutes using the remote
control.
At a glance
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the trunk lid
4 Panic mode, auxiliary air conditioning
Remote control range
The average range is the range when the vehi‐
cle is locked/unlocked.
Seite 150
Controls Climate control
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Switching on
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second. You can hear
that the air conditioning starts running.
The symbol is displayed on the air condi‐
tioning system.
Switching off
The function switches off automatically after
approx. two minutes or when the ignition is
switched on.
Seite 151
Climate control Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated universal remote
control
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled
systems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The integrated universal remote con‐
trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans‐
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be
programmed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the integrated universal re‐
mote control, ensure that there are no people,
animals, or objects in the range of movement
of the remote-controlled device; otherwise,
there is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the instructions of the system
to be controlled, the system is gener‐
ally compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐
son Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
Seite 152
Controls Interior equipment
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons on the interior
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐
pends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior rearview mirror. The
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐
gin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. When the LED is
flashing faster, this indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior rearview mirror has been
programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior rearview mirror and the
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-
code wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐
ing-code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
features an alternating-code system. Flashing
and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
peat for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual of the sys‐
tem being set up for information on how to
synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
To synchronize:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this work step up to three times in
order to finish synchronization. Once syn‐
chronization is complete, the programmed
function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
transmitter for the system to be controlled
approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The
required distance depends on the manual
transmitter.
Seite 153
Interior equipment Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this
indicates that the button on the interior
rearview mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the
button on the interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
Controls
Before operation
Before operating a system using the
integrated universal remote control, ensure
that there are no people, animals, or objects
within the range of movement of the remote-
controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of
injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the system
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Digital compass
At a glance
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
Seite 154
Controls Interior equipment
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the
set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone correspond‐
ing to your location appears in the mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong point of the compass is dis‐
played.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
played.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
button again to switch between English "E"
and German "O".
Seite 155
Interior equipment Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
The setting is stored automatically after ap‐
proximately 10 seconds.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
Raise cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
The lighter is located next to the ashtray.
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical
devices
Hints
Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
may damage the battery.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Seite 156
Controls Interior equipment
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Front center console
Raise the cap and remove the cover or ciga‐
rette lighter.
In the front passenger footwell
The socket is located below the glove com‐
partment.
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the left side in the
cargo area.
USB interface for data
transfer
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data
on USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 38.
▷ Music collection, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
▷ Importing trips, see user's manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: at a glance
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
Seite 157
Interior equipment Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
With Professional navigation system
or TV: at a glance
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
Notes
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Through-loading system
The concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40.
If equipped with through-loading system: the
rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20–
40.
The sides can be folded down separately or to‐
gether.
Hints
Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no
one is located in the area of movement and
that no one reaches into the area of movement
of the rear seat backrests when the middle
section is folded down. Otherwise, injury or
damage may result.◀
Lock the rear seat backrests in position
Before mounting child restraint fixing
systems, place the seat backrest as far as pos‐
sible at an angle at which the child seat is rest‐
ing firmly against the backrest and all back‐
rests can be locked securely in place.
Otherwise, the child seat will not be as stable
as it should be, and there is increased danger
of injury due to unexpected movement of the
seat backrest.◀
Retract the head restraint if necessary
before backrest is folded down
With folding head restraints, fold in the head
restraints before folding down the backrests,
or damage may result.◀
Opening
1.
Unlock the belt lock of the center safety
belt in the rear using the latch plate of an‐
other safety belt.
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
into the specially designated fixture on the
rear window shelf.
Seite 158
Controls Interior equipment
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
3. Push the corresponding head restraint
down as far as it will go.
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo
area to release the rear seat backrest.
5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves
forward slightly.
6. Fold backrest forward.
Closing
1.
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
Ensure that the lock is securely en‐
gaged
Make sure that the lock engages properly
when folding back, otherwise transported
cargo could enter the passenger compart‐
ment during braking or evasive maneuvers
and endanger the vehicle occupants.◀
2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on
the rear window shelf.
3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the
center safety belt. Make sure you hear the
latch plate engage.
To secure cargo, refer to page 172, with nets
or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
lashing eyes.
Folding down the middle section
1. Fold in the middle head restraint.
2. Reach into the recess and pull the middle
section forward.
Seite 159
Interior equipment Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Notes
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger
compartment without securing them; other‐
wise, they may present a danger to occupants
for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐
neuvers.◀
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 161.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 160.
▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage
compartment, in front of the cupholders,
refer to page 161.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 161.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 161.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
The net in the glove compartment is provided
for stowing the storage tray for the cupholder,
refer to page 162.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Seite 160
Controls Storage compartments
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the trunk
lid, refer to page 43, for example.
This prevents access to the glove compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Front storage compartment
Raise the lid to open it.
Compartments in the doors
Do not stow any breakable objects
Do not store any breakable objects, e. g.
glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is
an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐
cident.◀
Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning
Center armrest can be pushed forwards or
backwards. It engages in the end positions.
Seite 161
Storage compartments Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Connection for an external audio
device
.
Description, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication.
Cupholders
Hints
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
damage.◀
Front
Storage tray for front cupholders
The cupholder with the storage tray can be
used for additional storage. To do this, place
the storage tray in the cupholder.
Only use the storage tray for small objects,
such as keys or the remote control.
When not in use, stow the storage tray in the
glove compartment net. Insert the storage tray
into the net so that the top surface faces up.
Note the trapezoidal shape of the net and tray.
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Pushing back the covers
Push back the covers before folding up
the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder
could become damaged.◀
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the
hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers.◀
Seite 162
Controls Storage compartments
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Storage compartment
A storage compartment is located on the left
side.
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
Hooks/multi-function hook
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the cargo area. The multi-function hooks
can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.
Light and suitable objects only
Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger
of objects flying about during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
has been appropriately secured.◀
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the right side
trim for fastening small objects.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 172, there
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to Secure the
load, refer to page 172, and to store small
parts.
Storage compartment under cargo
floor panel
Maximum load
To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/
20 kg in the storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel.◀
Seite 163
Storage compartments Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake
discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during
this break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Using the hybrid system
efficiently
The concept
Your vehicle's hybrid system runs automati‐
cally. Through foresighted driving, the hybrid
properties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel con‐
sumption and energy recovery are optimized.
Optimizing energy recovery
Types of energy recovery
Energy recovery is used to charge the high-
voltage battery. It is important for the supply of
electrical components and thus a prerequisite
for fuel economy. It appears in three stages
during coasting to a halt and braking:
Low energy recovery:
Seite 166
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
When coasting to a halt without pressing the
brake pedal.
Average energy recovery:
During a slight deceleration by gently pressing
the brake pedal.
Maximum energy recovery:
By pressing the brake pedal harder.
Brake according to the situation
Brake in accordance with the traffic con‐
ditions, or there is the risk of accident.◀
Optimum energy recovery
As soon as the display shows the maximum
energy recovery, only press the brake pedal
harder if required by the situation.
Driving situation examples for fuel
economy
In many driving situations, the hybrid system
allows for a particularly efficient energy man‐
agement.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic:
The combustion engine is switched on or
over automatically by the hybrid system.
▷ Driving with constant speed:
With the ASSIST acceleration support, the
electric motor relieves the combustion en‐
gine periodically by being switched on au‐
tomatically.
Discharge of the high-voltage battery
In normal operation, a sufficient charging of the
high-voltage battery is ensured by energy re‐
covery. Longer idle periods can reduce the
charge state of the high-voltage battery.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for ex‐
tended periods with a low charging state
Before storing the vehicle for an extended pe‐
riod, check the battery charge indicator to en‐
sure that the high-voltage battery is fully
charged. If necessary, charge the high-voltage
battery by driving the vehicle. Check the
charge level regularly, and if necessary re‐
charge the high-voltage battery by driving the
vehicle. Allowing the high-voltage battery
charge to drop too low will damage the bat‐
tery.◀
Charging by driving
In order to charge the high-voltage battery
most effectively when driving, activated the
transmission's Sport program DS, refer to
page 74.
Coasting to a standstill and braking phases are
used more often to recover energy.
eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start
Stop function will also be deactivated.
Seite 167
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Fast charging
In exceptional cases it can be charged in place,
such as before extended idle phases in order
to prevent damage to the high-voltage battery.
1. Start the engine.
2. Engage transmission position P and set
parking brake.
3. Press and hold down brake pedal.
4. Use the accelerator pedal to maintain an
engine speed of approx. 2,000 rpm.
After a few minutes, the high-voltage battery is
fully charged again.
The battery charge indicator in the instrument
cluster, refer to page 82, is used to check the
status.
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Drive with the trunk lid closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking and
evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road
users may be injured, and the vehicle may be
damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
ter the passenger compartment.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot
exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐
ous personal injury as well as property dam‐
age.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,
there is the danger of getting burned.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐
munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in‐
side the vehicle without connecting them di‐
rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
devices can interfere with each other. In addi‐
tion, there is no assurance that the radiation
generated during transmission will be dis‐
charged from the vehicle interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only and only if it is
not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
height, no faster than walking speed, up to
6 mph/10 km/h.
Seite 168
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the
electrical systems and the transmission may
be damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐
ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a
minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, for example.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet coated with road salt or
there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres‐
sure on the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required.
Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐
sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if necessary.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear
and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist is un‐
available with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion
The corrosion on the brake discs and the con‐
tamination on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Seite 169
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Condensation under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops that exits under‐
neath the vehicle.
Traces of water under the vehicle like this are
normal.
Seite 170
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Loading
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Hints
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐
ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐
hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and
increases the rate at which damage develops
inside the tires. This could result in a sudden
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the trunk
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀
Determining the load limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Seite 171
Loading Driving tips
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Stowing cargo
▷ The cover of the high-voltage battery is lo‐
cated in the trunk. Do not remove the cover
to stow luggage.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo there are four lashing
eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to Secure the
load and to store small parts.
Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
area floor.
Securing cargo
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps, the floor net or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or
draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger
the car's occupants if sudden braking or
swerving becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Note
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Seite 172
Driving tips Loading
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof
drip rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not be too large in
area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Seite 173
Loading Driving tips
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can have an
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption values in
various ways, for instance fuel consumption
can be influenced by the size of the tires.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
tion pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Seite 174
Driving tips Saving fuel
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Braking longer will charge the high-voltage
battery more.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
accelerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle
automatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
Using this system can cause certain compo‐
nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐
turely.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they
are not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your
service center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 198.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the
climate control output, are adjusted.
eDRIVE electric driving, refer to page 68, and
the Coasting, refer to page 68, driving status
are becoming increasingly possible.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions can
be displayed that assist in driving in a manner
that optimizes fuel consumption.
The extension of the range that is achieved as
a result can be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
At a glance
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 176.
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to
page 177
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 176.
Seite 175
Saving fuel Driving tips
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Configure the program.
Via the iDrive
1.
"Settings"
2. "ECO PRO mode"
Or
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip
▷ "Tip at:":
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO
Tip is to be displayed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO
speed is exceeded.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐
cient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel
consumption can be economized.
The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
mirror heating are also reduced.
The exterior mirror heating is made available
when outside temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO potential
The percentage of potential savings that can
be achieved with the current configuration is
displayed.
Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO bonus range
An extension of the range can
be achieved by an adjusted driv‐
ing style.
This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
Driving style
In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in‐
dicates the current efficiency of the driving
style.
Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for
energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display
when accelerating.
The efficiency of the driving style is shown by
the color of the bar:
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the blue range.
Seite 176
Driving tips Saving fuel
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving
are met.
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction
The arrow indicates that the
driving style can be adjusted to
be more fuel efficient by backing
off the accelerator for instance.
Note
The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in
the instrument cluster appear when the ECO
PRO display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
ECO PRO tip - Symbols
An additional symbol and a text instruction are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving style, back off
the accelerator or delay accelerating
to allow time to assess road condi‐
tions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Automatic transmission: switch
from M/S to D and avoid manual
shift interventions.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying ECO PRO Tips
During the trip, ECO PRO tips can be dis‐
played in the energy flow display.
Displaying ECO PRO Tips:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Hybrid"
3. "ECO PRO Tips"
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
Coasting
The concept
The system helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when transmission position D is engaged.
The vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis‐
sion position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is
depressed, the engine is automatically coupled
to the transmission again.
Hints
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐
fer to page 175, driving mode.
The function is available in a certain speed
range.
A forward-looking driving style helps the driver
to use the function as often as possible and
supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast‐
ing.
Safety mode
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions is satisfied.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
Seite 177
Saving fuel Driving tips
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
sive current.
▷ Cruise control activated.
Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
the following conditions are satisfied:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the bar display be‐
low the tachometer is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero
point. The tachometer approxi‐
mately indicates idle speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Indications on the Control Display
The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
is active.
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:
driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
Deactivating the system manually
The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure ECO PRO, refer to page 176, menu, e.g., to
use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐
eling downhill.
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
ECO PRO Analyser
The concept
The system helps in this situation to develop
an especially efficient driving style and to con‐
serve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
Using this indication, the individual driving
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
an efficient driving style. This gain in range is
displayed as a bonus range in the instrument
cluster and on the Control Display.
Seite 178
Driving tips Saving fuel
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Functional requirement
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
Calling up ECO PRO Analyser
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3. Select the symbol.
Display
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO Analysers con‐
sists of a symbolized road route and a lookup
table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted road route be‐
comes, arrow 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
stars is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during the drive.
Tips about the energy saving driving style,
Conserving fuel, refer to page 174.
Seite 179
Saving fuel Driving tips
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Do not refuel unless the engine is at a
standstill and the transmission is in posi‐
tion P/N
Do not refuel unless the engine is at a standstill
and the transmission is in position P/N, other‐
wise the buildup of pressure may cause the
fuel nozzle to shut off prematurely.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be
closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
Seite 182
Mobility Refueling
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To
do this, reach behind the top part of the
trim and pull.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐
ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the
gas station.◀
Seite 183
Refueling Mobility
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Fuel recommendation
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐
out metallic additives.
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic
converter and other components.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as
this would damage the engine and fuel supply
system.◀
Gasoline quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
formance.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Fuel quality
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐
ers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Seite 184
Mobility Fuel
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the
tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is
higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐
serve this precaution, you may be driving on
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that may not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
and the risk of an accident.◀
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:
▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 186, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire
brands. This information can be obtained from
your service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 186, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
Seite 185
Wheels and tires Mobility
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
ActiveHybrid 3
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 91 V M
+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M
+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V M
+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear:
255/40 R 18 95 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear:
255/35 R 19 92 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
3.0 / 44
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
ActiveHybrid 3
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 91 V M
+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M
+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V M
+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear:
255/40 R 18 95 Y
RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear:
255/35 R 19 92 Y
RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
3.0 / 44
Seite 186
Mobility Wheels and tires
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.9 /42
-
-
3.4 / 49
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M
+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V M
+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Front: 225/45 R 18
91 Y RSC
Rear:
255/40 R 18 95 Y
RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40 R 19
89 Y RSC
Rear:
255/35 R 19 92 Y
RSC
2.7 / 39
-
-
3.0 / 44
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Front: 225/35 R 20
90 Y XL RSC
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
2.9 /42
-
-
3.4 / 49
Compact wheel
T 135/80 R 17 102
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
1013: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Seite 187
Wheels and tires Mobility
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Tire age
DOT … 1013: the tire was manufactured in the
10th week 2013.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 191, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Seite 188
Mobility Wheels and tires
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; other‐
wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If
necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening
for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici‐
pants.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Seite 189
Wheels and tires Mobility
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐
tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be
obtained from your service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐
tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle if they are mounted.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
New tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do
provide better winter traction than summer
tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐
formance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field
of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire
specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐
cidents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
Seite 190
Mobility Wheels and tires
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be
glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against switching wheels between the front
and rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 105.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 102.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of your
vehicle, classified as road-safe and recom‐
mended.
Consult your service center for more informa‐
tion.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/60 R 16.
▷ 225/55 R 16.
▷ 225/50 R 17.
▷ 225/45 R 18.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Seite 191
Wheels and tires Mobility
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative terminal
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Washer fluid reservoir
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Engine compartment fuse box
6 Oil filler neck
7 Coolant reservoir
The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.
Seite 192
Mobility Engine compartment
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Hood
Hints
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Never reach into the engine compart‐
ment
Never reach into the intermediate spaces or
gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot
parts.◀
Fold down wiper arm
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield, or this
may result in damage.◀
Opening the hood
1.
Pull lever in the interior:
Engine is released, arrow 1.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again:
Hood can be opened, arrow 2.
Indicator/warning lamps
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
mediately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 193
Engine compartment Mobility
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions. When
a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil
consumption, for example, is clearly higher.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Checking the oil level
electronically
Status display
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically during
driving and shown on the Control Display.
If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a
check control message is displayed.
Requirements
Depending on the previous displays, the status
display is displayed when the engine is running
or after the vehicle has been driven for at least
30 minutes.
Displaying the oil level
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these
messages.
If oil level is too low, immediately add 1 US
quart/liter of oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the oil level is
checked and displayed via a scale.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Requirements
▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever in
transmission position N or P and accelera‐
tor not depressed.
▷ Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is
running at operating temperature.
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Seite 194
Mobility Engine oil
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The oil level is checked and displayed via a
scale.
Duration: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
When the indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within
the next 125 miles/200 km.
Do not add too much engine oil
When too much engine oil is added, im‐
mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,
this may cause engine damage.◀
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Hints
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Viscosity grades for engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine
damage may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐
able in all countries.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30.
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Additional information about the approved
types of oils can be requested from the service
center.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior grade specification.
Oil change
An oil change should be carried out by your
service center only.
Seite 195
Engine oil Mobility
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Seite 196
Mobility Engine oil
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Coolant
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant
may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen‐
ter for suitable additives.
Coolant level
Checking
Marks are provided on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
Symbol Meaning
Maximum
Minimum
1. Let the engine cool.
2. The coolant level is correct when it is be‐
tween these two marks.
Adding engine oil
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐
cess pressure to dissipate, and then open
it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the cap must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 197
Coolant Mobility
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
BMW Maintenance System
The maintenance system directs you to re‐
quired maintenance measures and thereby
supports you in maintaining road safety and
the operational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Detailed information on service requirements,
refer to page 84, can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control.
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control with which the vehicle was driven
most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
Service history
Perform maintenance work at the service cen‐
ter and have them recorded in the vehicle data.
The entries are like a service booklet of the
documentation of regular maintenance.
Displaying entered maintenance work on the
Control Display, refer to page 85.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed
by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
nance.
Seite 198
Mobility Maintenance
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Canadian model: warning light indi‐
cates the engine symbol.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that
fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight‐
ened, the display should go out in a short time.
Seite 199
Maintenance Mobility
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in a
storage compartment under the cargo floor
cover in the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
Note
Do not fold down the wipers without
wiper blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades
have not been installed; this may damage the
windshield.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1.
To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 72, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Folding down wipers before opening the
hood
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with the wiper blades are against
the windshield to prevent damage.◀
Lamp and bulb replacement
Hints
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at the service center.
Seite 200
Mobility Replacing components
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system,
you should always switch off the lights af‐
fected to prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display
elements and other equipment.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
lamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not dim despite driving
with the light switched on, increasing humidity
forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the
service center check this.
Headlamp setting
The headlamp adjustments can be affected by
changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a
change, have the headlamp setting checked
and corrected by Service.
Front lamps, bulb replacement
Halogen headlamps
1 Parking lamps
2 High beams/headlamp flasher
3 Low beams
4 Turn signal
5 Daytime running lights
Seite 201
Replacing components Mobility
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Accessing the turn signals and low beams
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 200.
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.
Turn signal
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1.
If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
holder counterclockwise and remove.
2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
Low beams
55-watt bulb, H7.
1. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐
move.
2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it
from the holder and remove.
3. Pull the connector off the bulb.
4. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
5. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
place.
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.
Make sure that the cap engages.
7. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
Seite 202
Mobility Replacing components
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Accessing the daytime running lights, high
beams/headlamp flasher and parking
lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 200.
1. Open the hood, refer to page 193.
2. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐
move.
Parking lamps
6-watt bulb, H6W.
1.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
remove.
2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed
in reverse order of removal. Make sure that
the bulb holder snaps into place.
4. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.
Make sure that the cap engages.
High beams/headlamp flasher
55-watt bulb, H7.
1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it
from the holder and remove.
2. Pull the connector off the bulb.
3. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
4. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
place.
5. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.
Make sure that the cap engages.
Seite 203
Replacing components Mobility
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Daytime running lights
24-watt bulb, PW24W.
1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulb
connector.
2. Remove the bulb holder.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.
4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐
tom of the bulb holder must be facing
downward. Make sure that the bulb holder
snaps into place.
5. Attach the high beam bulb connector.
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.
Make sure that the cap engages.
Xenon headlamps
Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lamps on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
Headlamps
1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights
2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal
Low beams and high beams are designed with
xenon technology.
The parking lamps and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 200.
Seite 204
Mobility Replacing components
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.
2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
holder counterclockwise and remove.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
5. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
Front fog lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 200.
35-watt bulb, H8.
1.
Use the back side of the screwdriver from
the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the
three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.
Carefully raise the wheel house panel, ar‐
row 2.
2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1.
Turn the bulb, arrow 2.
Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise.
Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐
wise.
Remove the bulb.
3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector
and screw on the wheel house panel.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 200.
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. Contact your service center
in the event of a malfunction.
Seite 205
Replacing components Mobility
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Turn signal
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Tail lamps
5 Outside brake lamp
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps
General information
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 200.
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21W.
Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W.
The tail lamps feature LED technology. Con‐
tact your service center in the event of a mal‐
function.
Use caution when replacing the bulb
Use caution and proceed one step at a
time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐
age to the tail lamps or vehicle.◀
Removing the exterior tail lamp
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit to loosen the screw, arrow 1,
and remove the cover, arrow 2.
3. Use the screwdriver handle to loosen the
two nuts, arrows 1 and 2, and remove. The
tail lamp is still attached to a rubber mount
on the outside.
4. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp and
carefully swing it back and out of the rub‐
ber mount, arrow 1. Use your free hand to
hold it in place in order to prevent the tail
lamp from coming loose suddenly. Make
sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on
the centering pin, arrow 2.
Seite 206
Mobility Replacing components
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
5. Remove the connecting line from the clip
on the bulb holder.
6. Release the catch at the top on the con‐
nector of the connecting line and remove
the connector from the bulb holder.
Replacing the bulbs
1. Loosen the four fasteners, arrow 1, on the
bulb holder and remove the bulb holder
from the tail lamp, arrow 2.
2. Press the defective bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Installing the tail lamp
1.
Connect the connecting line to the tail
lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip.
2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing
ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is
not damaged.
3. Position and firmly press the outer part of
the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐
row 1 and the inner part onto the centering
component, arrow 2. Make sure that the
tail lamp engages in the rubber mount.
4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts.
5. Fit the cover in place and screw onto the
fastener. Make sure that the tubular seal is
not pinched.
Lamps in the trunk lid
General information
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 200.
Reversing lamps: 21-watt bulb, P21W.
Inner brake lamps: 21-watt bulb, H21W
Accessing the lamps
1.
Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re‐
move the six screws on the trim.
2. Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid,
starting at the edge and working toward
the area around the recessed grips. Make
sure that the trim does not become stuck.
3. Carefully swing out the trim.
Seite 207
Replacing components Mobility
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Replacing the reversing lamp and inner
brake lamp
1. Loosen the two fasteners, arrow 1 and pull
down on the lamp holder to remove, ar‐
row 2.
2. Press the defective bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Insert the new bulb.
Installing the bulb holder
1.
Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide
pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐
row 2, into the connections, arrow 3.
2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that
the two exterior fasteners latch into place.
3. Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and
secure.
Tail lamp, license plate lamp and
central brake lamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 200.
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Changing wheels
Hints
The vehicle equipment does not include a
spare tire.
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Position the vehicle jack only at the loca‐
tions shown
There are also hybrid components under the
vehicle that are hidden by the underbody pan‐
eling.
Make sure not to damage any of the under‐
body paneling parts.
Otherwise, there is the risk of fatal injury from
electric shock due to damaged high-voltage
components.◀
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you
on questions regarding the battery.
Seite 208
Mobility Replacing components
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐
ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available and that any Check Control mes‐
sages of these comfort functions are no longer
displayed.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
may damage the battery.◀
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month.
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 213, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Radio station: saving new, see user's
manual for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability
of the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Notes
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
Seite 209
Replacing components Mobility
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
In the engine compartment
1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Attaching the covers
1.
When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the
three screws.
In the cargo area
Raise the cargo floor panel.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 210
Mobility Replacing components
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Intelligent Emergency
Request
Requirements
▷ The radio ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ A ConnectedDrive contract is available.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Hints
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
able conditions.◀
Initiating an Emergency Request
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes when a connection to the
BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished.
When the emergency request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle
Seite 211
Breakdown assistance Mobility
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
if it can be established, are transmitted to
the BMW Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re‐
sponse Center can no longer be heard via
the speaker, you can nevertheless still be
heard for the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the trunk lid.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First aid kit
Note
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐
ment under the cargo floor cover.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to
Roadside Assistance can be established di‐
rectly.
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
Seite 212
Mobility Breakdown assistance
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
tive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
Be careful not to swap over the positive
and negative connector terminals
Do not swap over the positive and negative
terminals of the connectors, otherwise there is
a danger that components of the hybrid sys‐
tem or the vehicle electronics may be irrepara‐
bly damaged.
Take note of the label next to the positive ter‐
minal.◀
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehi‐
cles.
1.
Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
Seite 213
Breakdown assistance Mobility
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Automatic transmission: transporting
your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the
event of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐
cur.◀
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Seite 214
Mobility Breakdown assistance
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during
cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is
secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW. It is in a storage com‐
partment under the cargo floor cover in the
cargo area.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the top
edge.
Tow-starting
Automatic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Safety of the hybrid system
Hybrid system work
Your vehicle's hybrid system is a self-con‐
tained system. Safety is ensured as long as no
work is performed on the technical compo‐
nents.
Thus, have work on the vehicle, for instance
retrofitting accessories, performed by the
service center or a workshop that works ac‐
cording to BMW specifications with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
Seite 215
Breakdown assistance Mobility
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Maintenance and repairs
Have maintenance and repair work per‐
formed only by a service center or a workshop
that works according to BMW specifications
with appropriately trained personnel. Other‐
wise, there is the risk of fatal injury from elec‐
tric shock due to the hybrid system's high volt‐
age.◀
Hybrid system: contact with water
The hybrid system is typically safe even in the
following example situations:
▷ Water in the footwell, for instance after a
rainstorm when the glass sunroof is open.
▷ Vehicle is in the water, such as in the event
of high water levels.
▷ Liquid escapes in the trunk.
In these cases there is no risk of injury from
electric shock. Other damages on the vehicle
are possible.
Hybrid system: automatic
deactivation
If an accident occurs, the hybrid system is
switched off automatically in order not to en‐
danger occupants and other road users.
Read the information on What to do after an
accident, refer to page 216.
What to do after an accident
General information
After an accident
After an accident, do not touch any high-
voltage components such as orange colored
high-voltage cables or parts that are in contact
with exposed high-voltage cables. Otherwise,
there is the risk of fatal injury from electric
shock due to the hybrid system's high volt‐
age.◀
Escaping fluids
Do not touch any fluids escaping from
the high-voltage battery, or the skin can sus‐
tain chemical burns.◀
If you are involved in an accident with your ve‐
hicle, compliance with the following additional
safety precautions is required with regard to
the hybrid system:
▷ Secure the crash site.
▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or
firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is
equipped with a hybrid system.
▷ Engage transmission position P, apply the
parking brake, and switch off the ignition or
deactivate drive readiness.
▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting.
▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the
high-voltage battery, if necessary keep a
distance to the vehicle.
Seite 216
Mobility Breakdown assistance
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Care
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Car washes
Hints
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a
distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐
tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐
sively high pressures or temperatures can
cause damage or preliminary damage that may
then lead to long-term damage.
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure
washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control, for extended periods of
time and only from a distance of at least
12 in/30 cm.◀
Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the
hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
vehicle.
Automatic car washes
Hints
Note the following:
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 71, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
vation.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
be triggered by the interior motion sensor
of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
refer to page 47.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
Automatic transmission:
1.
Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
Seite 217
Care Mobility
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Do not turn off the ignition in the car
wash
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash;
otherwise, the transmission position P is
engaged and damages can result.◀
For activation of drive readiness:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in transmission position N. A signal is
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlamps
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due
to insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
influences.
Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel,
oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed
immediately to prevent the finish from being
altered or discolored.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Seite 218
Mobility Care
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use
a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐
ble interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the seat
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber
cleansers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
silicon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Lightly dampen the cloth with water.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
to surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Seite 219
Care Mobility
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, for example.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐
ger compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass
cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household
cleansers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the
unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
For idle phases that last several weeks, park
the vehicle with a fully charged battery if possi‐
ble. Your service center can advise you on
what to consider when storing the vehicle for
longer than six weeks.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for ex‐
tended periods with a low charging state
Before storing the vehicle for an extended pe‐
riod, check the battery charge indicator to en‐
sure that the high-voltage battery is fully
charged. If necessary, charge the high-voltage
battery by driving the vehicle. Check the
charge level regularly, and if necessary re‐
charge the high-voltage battery by driving the
vehicle. Allowing the high-voltage battery
charge to drop too low will damage the bat‐
tery.◀
Note
Follow the instructions for discharging the
high-voltage battery, refer to page 167.
Seite 220
Mobility Care
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Seite 221
Care Mobility
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
equipment or country variant. This also applies
for safety-related functions and systems.
Dimensions
Width, height
1 Vehicle height, without roof-mounted aer‐
ial: 56.3 inches/1,429 mm
Vehicle height, with roof-mounted aerial:
56.7 inches/1,441 mm
2 Vehicle width, without mirrors: 71.3 inches/
1,811 mm
3 Vehicle width, with mirrors: 79.9 inches/
2,031 mm
Seite 224
Reference Technical data
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Length, wheel base
1 Wheel base: 110.6 inches/2,810 mm 2 Vehicle length: 182.1 inches/4,627 mm
Smallest turning circle
Dia.: 37 ft/11.3 m
Weights
ActiveHybrid 3
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs
kg
4,815
2,184
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,250/1,021
Approved rear axle load lbs
kg
2,710
1,229
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165.4/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 13.77/390
Seite 225
Technical data Reference
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Seite 227
Technical data Reference
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 118
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 123
Acceleration Assistant, refer
to Launch Control 76
Activated-charcoal filter 148
Activate drive readiness 66
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 113
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 123
ActiveHybrid, system 31
Active Protection 115
Adapting to the course of the
road, hybrid system 84
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 115
Adaptive Light Control 93
Additives, oil 195
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 51
After washing vehicle 218
Airbags 97
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 98
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 147
Air distribution, manual 148
Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 147
Air flow, automatic climate
control 148
Air pressure, tires 185
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 149
Alarm system 46
Alarm, unintentional 47
All around the center con‐
sole 16
All around the headliner 17
All around the steering
wheel 14
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 190
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 153
Alternative oil types 195
Antifreeze, washer fluid 73
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 118
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 118
Approved engine oils 195
Arrival time 89
Ash tray 156
Assistance for the combus‐
tion engine, ASSIST 69
Assistance for the combus‐
tion engine, eBOOST 69
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 212
Assistance when driving
off 121
ASSIST, assistance for the
combustion engine 69
Assist system information, on
Control Display 91
Attentiveness assistant 115
AUTO intensity 147
Automatic car wash 217
Automatic climate control
with enhanced features 146
Automatic Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 123
Automatic Curb Monitor 59
Automatic deactivation, front
passenger airbags 99
Automatic deactivation of the
hybrid system 216
Automatic engine start-stop
function 67
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 93
Automatic locking 45
Automatic recirculated-air
control 147
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 73
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 147
AUTO program, intensity 147
Auxiliary air conditioning 150
Average fuel consumption 88
Average speed 89
Axle loads, weights 225
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 53
Backrest, width 53
Backup camera 134
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 212
Bar for tow-starting/
towing 214
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 209
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 36
Battery, vehicle 208
Belts, safety belts 54
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 162
Blinds, sun protection 49
BMW ActiveHybrid 31
BMW Assist, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
Seite 228
Reference Everything from A to Z
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 198
Bonus range, ECO PRO 176
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 162
Brake assistant 118
Brake discs, breaking in 166
Brake force display 115
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 115
Brake lights, adaptive 115
Brake pads, breaking in 166
Braking, hints 169
Breakdown assis‐
tance 211, 212
Breaking in 166
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 91
Bulb replacement 200
Bulb replacement, front 201
Bulb replacement, halogen
headlamps 201
Bulb replacement, rear 206
Bulb replacement, xenon
headlamps 204
Bulbs and lamps 200
Button, RES 126
Button, Start/Stop 65
Bypassing, refer to Jump-
starting 212
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, care 220
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 134
Camera, Side View 137
Camera, Top View 138
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 162
Car battery 208
Car care products 218
Care, displays 220
Care, vehicle 218
Cargo 171
Cargo area, enlarging 158
Cargo area lid 42
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 163
Cargo, securing 172
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 172
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 36
Carpet, care 220
Car wash 217
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 168
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 198
CD/Multimedia, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Center armrest 161
Center console 16
Center-Lock, see button for
central locking 39
Central locking system 39
Central screen, refer to Con‐
trol Display 18
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7
Changing parts 200
Changing wheels 208
Changing wheels/tires 189
CHARGE, energy recov‐
ery 69
Charge indicator, high-volt‐
age battery 82
Check Control 78
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 194
Children, seating position 61
Children, transporting
safely 61
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 61
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 62
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 61
Child safety locks 64
Child seat, mounting 61
Child seats 61
Chrome parts, care 219
Cigarette lighter 156
Cleaning, displays 220
Climate control 146
Clock 81
Closing/opening from in‐
side 42
Closing/opening via door
lock 41
Closing/opening with remote
control 40
Clothes hooks 162
Coasting 68
Cockpit 14
Collision warning with City
Braking function 106
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signals 70
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 71
Combustion engine, start‐
ing 67
Comfort Access 43
COMFORT program, Dy‐
namic Driving Control 121
Compartments in the
doors 161
Compass 154
Computer 88
Condensation on win‐
dows 148
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 170
Condition Based Service
CBS 198
Confirmation signal 45
Seite 229
Everything from A to Z Reference
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
ConnectedDrive, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
ConnectedDrive Services
Connecting electrical devi‐
ces 156
Contact with water, hybrid
system 216
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 90
Controller 18, 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 118
Convenient opening 40
Coolant 197
Coolant temperature 81
Cooling function 147
Cooling, maximum 147
Cooling system 197
Corrosion on brake discs 169
Cruise control 129
Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go 123
Cruising range 81
Cupholder 162
Current fuel consumption 84
D
Damage, tires 189
Damping control, dy‐
namic 119
Data, technical 224
Date 81
Daytime running lights 93
Deactivating drive readi‐
ness 67
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 148
Destination distance 89
Digital clock 81
Digital compass 154
Dimensions 224
Dimmable exterior mirrors 59
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 59
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 70
Display, electronic, instru‐
ment cluster 78
Display in windshield 144
Display lighting, refer to In‐
strument lighting 95
Displays 77
Displays, cleaning 220
Displays, hybrid system 82
Disposal, coolant 197
Disposal, vehicle battery 209
Distance control, refer to
PDC 131
Distance to destination 89
Divided screen view, split
screen 23
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 36
DRIVE, Driving with combus‐
tion engine 69
Drive-off assistant 121
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 118
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 105
Drive readiness in detail 66
Drive readiness states 65
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 105
Driving experience
switch 120
Driving instructions, breaking
in 166
Driving instructions, hybrid
system 166
Driving mode 120
Driving notes, general 168
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 118
Driving tips 168
Driving with combustion en‐
gine, DRIVE 69
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 118
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 119
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 119
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 118
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 119
E
eBOOST, assistance for the
combustion engine 69
ECO PRO 175
ECO PRO Analyser 178
ECO PRO, bonus range 176
ECO PRO display 175
ECO PRO driving mode 175
ECO PRO mode 175
ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
struction 177
eDRIVE, electric driving 68
Electric drive readiness, Si‐
lent Start 66
Electric driving, eDRIVE 68
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 78
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 118
Emergency detection, remote
control 37
Emergency release, door
lock 41
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 182
Emergency Request 211
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 212
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 37
Emergency unlocking, trunk
lid 43
Energy recovery,
CHARGE 69
Seite 230
Reference Everything from A to Z
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Engine, automatic off 67
Engine compartment 192
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 193
Engine coolant 197
Engine oil 194
Engine oil, adding 195
Engine oil additives 195
Engine oil change 195
Engine oil filler neck 195
Engine oil temperature 80
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 195
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 195
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 37
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 212
Engine temperature 80
Entering a car wash 217
Equipment, interior 152
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 118
Exchanging wheels/tires 189
Exhaust system 168
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 59
Exterior mirrors 58
External start 212
External temperature dis‐
play 81
External temperature warn‐
ing 81
Eyes for securing cargo 172
F
Failure message, refer to
Check Control 78
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 47
Fan, refer to Air flow 148
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 78
Filler neck for engine oil 195
Fine wood, care 219
First aid kit 212
Fitting for towing, refer to
Tow fitting 215
Flat tire, changing
wheels 208
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 103
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 100
Flat tire, warning
lamp 101, 104
Flooding 168
Floor carpet, care 220
Floor mats, care 220
Fold down the rear seat back‐
rest, see Though-loading
system 158
Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 72
Foot brake 169
Front airbags 97
Front fog lamps 95
Front fog lamps, front, bulb
replacement 205
Front lamps 201
Front passenger airbags, au‐
tomatic deactivation 99
Front passenger airbags, indi‐
cator lamp 99
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 103
Fuel 184
Fuel cap 182
Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump‐
tion 88
Fuel filler flap 182
Fuel gauge 80
Fuel quality 184
Fuel recommendation 184
Fuel, tank capacity 226
Functions, hybrid system 31
Fuse 209
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 152
Gasoline 184
Gasoline quality 184
Gear change, automatic
transmission 74
Gear shift indicator 85
General driving notes 168
Glass sunroof, powered 49
Glove compartment 160
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 225
Gross weight, permissible for
trailer towing 225
H
Handbrake, refer to parking
brake 69
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 153
Hazard warning flashers 211
Head airbags 97
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 93
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 92
Headlamp flasher 70
Headlamp glass 201
Headlamps 201
Headlamps, care 218
Headlamp washer system 71
Headliner 17
Head restraints 51
Head restraints, front 55
Head restraints, rear 56
Head-up Display 144
Head-up Display, care 220
Heavy cargo, stowing 172
Height, vehicle 224
High-beam Assistant 94
High beams 70
Seite 231
Everything from A to Z Reference
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 94
High-voltage battery, charge
indicator 82
High voltage battery, dis‐
charge 167
Hills 169
Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 121
Hints 6
Holder for beverages 162
Homepage 6
Hood 193
Horn 14
Hotel function, trunk lid 43
Hot exhaust system 168
HUD Head-up Display 144
Hybrid system, adapting to
the course of the road 84
Hybrid system, at a glance 31
Hybrid system, automatic de‐
activation 216
Hybrid system, contact with
water 216
Hybrid system, displays 82
Hybrid system, safety 215
Hydroplaning 168
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 81
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 81
Identification marks, tires 187
Identification number, refer to
Important features in the en‐
gine compartment 192
iDrive 18
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 36
Ignition off 65
Ignition on 65
Indication of a flat
tire 101, 104
Indicator and warning
lamps 78
Individual air distribution 148
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 37
Inflation pressure, tires 185
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 103
Info display, refer to Com‐
puter 88
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 101
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 104
Instrument cluster 77
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 78
Instrument lighting 95
Integrated key 36
Integrated universal remote
control 152
Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 211
Intelligent Safety 105
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 147
Interior equipment 152
Interior lamps 95
Interior lamps via remote con‐
trol 40
Interior motion sensor 47
Interior rearview mirror 59
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 59
Interior rearview mirror, com‐
pass 154
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 84
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 208
Joystick, automatic transmis‐
sion 74
Jump-starting 212
K
Key/remote control 36
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 43
Key Memory, refer to Per‐
sonal Profile 37
Kickdown, automatic trans‐
mission 74
Knee airbag 97
L
Lamp replacement 200
Lamp replacement, front 201
Lamp replacement, rear 206
Lamps 92
Lamps and bulbs 200
Lane departure warning 112
Lane margin, warning 112
Language on Control Dis‐
play 90
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 172
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 62
Launch Control 76
Leather, care 218
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 201
Length, vehicle 225
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 24
Light alloy wheels, care 219
Light control 93
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 201
Lighter 156
Lighting 92
Lighting via remote con‐
trol 40
Light switch 92
Load 171
Loading 171
Seite 232
Reference Everything from A to Z
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Lock, door 41
Locking/unlocking from in‐
side 42
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 41
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 40
Locking, automatic 45
Locking, central 39
Locking, settings 45
Lock, power window 48
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 64
Low beams 92
Low beams, automatic, refer
to High-beam Assistant 94
Lower back support 53
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 172
Lumbar support 53
M
Maintenance 198
Maintenance require‐
ments 198
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 84
Maintenance system,
BMW 198
Malfunction displays, refer to
Check Control 78
Manual air distribution 148
Manual air flow 148
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 74
Manual operation, door
lock 41
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 59
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 182
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 132
Manual operation, rearview
camera 135
Manual operation, Side
View 137
Manual operation, Top
View 138
Marking on approved
tires 190
Marking, run-flat tires 191
Master key, refer to Remote
control 36
Maximum cooling 147
Maximum speed, display 86
Maximum speed, winter
tires 190
Measure, units of 91
Medical kit 212
Memory, seat, mirror 57
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 87
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 20
Messages, refer to Check
Control 78
Microfilter 148
Minimum tread, tires 189
Mirror 58
Mirror memory 57
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 168
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7
Moisture in headlamp 201
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 61
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
N
Navigation, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 55
Neck restraints, rear, refer to
Head restraints 56
Neutral cleaner, see wheel
cleaner 219
New wheels and tires 189
No Passing Information 86
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 215
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 199
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 199
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 136
Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐
line quality 184
Odometer 81
Office, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Officially use hybrid sys‐
tem 166
Oil 194
Oil, adding 195
Oil additives 195
Oil change 195
Oil change interval, service
requirements 84
Oil filler neck 195
Oil types, alternative 195
Oil types, approved 195
Old batteries, disposal 209
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 200
Opening and closing 36
Opening and closing, from in‐
side 42
Opening and closing via door
lock 41
Opening and closing, with re‐
mote control 40
Opening the trunk lid with no-
touch activation 44
Seite 233
Everything from A to Z Reference
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 6
Outside air, refer to Auto‐
matic recirculated-air con‐
trol 147
Overheating of engine, refer
to Coolant temperature 81
Overtaking prohibitions 86
P
Paint, vehicle 218
Parallel parking assistant 140
Park Distance Control
PDC 131
Parked-car ventilation 149
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 170
Parking aid, refer to PDC 131
Parking assistant 140
Parking brake 69
Parking lamps 92
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 59
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 135
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 131
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function 110
Permissible axle load 225
Personal Profile 37
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 50
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 48
Plastic, care 219
Power failure 209
Power sunroof, glass 49
Power windows 47
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 185
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 103
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 37
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 24
Protective function, glass
sunroof 50
Protective function, win‐
dows 48
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 18, 19
R
Radiator fluid 197
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 36
Radio ready state 65
Radio, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Rain sensor 71
Rear lamps 206
Rear socket 157
Rearview mirror 58
Rear window defroster 148
Recirculated-air filter 148
Recirculated-air mode 147
Recommended tire
brands 190
Refueling 182
Remaining range 81
Remote control/key 36
Remote control, auxiliary air
conditioning, key 150
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 40
Remote control, univer‐
sal 152
Replacement fuse 209
Replacing parts 200
Replacing wheels/tires 189
Reporting safety defects 9
RES button 126
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 81
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 101
Residual cooling 150
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 172
Retreaded tires 190
Roadside parking lamps 93
Roller sunblinds 49
RON gasoline quality 184
Roof load capacity 225
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 172
Rope for tow-starting/
towing 215
RSC Run Flat System Com‐
ponent, refer to Run-flat
tires 191
Rubber components,
care 219
Run-flat tires 191
S
Safe braking 169
Safety 7
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 55
Safety belts 54
Safety belts, care 219
Safety of the hybrid sys‐
tem 215
Safety Package, refer to Ac‐
tive Protection 115
Safety switch, windows 48
Safety systems, airbags 97
Saving fuel 174
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Screwdriver 200
Screw thread for tow fit‐
ting 215
Seat and mirror memory 57
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 54
Seat heating, front 54
Seite 234
Reference Everything from A to Z
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Seat heating, rear 54
Seating position for chil‐
dren 61
Seats 51
Selection list in instrument
cluster 87
Selector lever, automatic
transmission 74
Sensors, care 220
Service and warranty 8
Service history 85
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 198
Service requirements, dis‐
play 84
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 212
Services, ConnectedDrive
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 45
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 90
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
ror 57
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion 73
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 75
Side airbags 97
Side View 136
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 45
Silent Start, electric drive
readiness 66
Sitting safely 51
Size 224
Slide/tilt glass roof 49
Smallest turning circle 225
Snow chains 191
Socket 156
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 199
SOS button 211
Spare fuse 209
Specified engine oil
types 195
Speed, average 89
Speed limit detection, on‐
board computer 89
Speed limiter, display 86
Speed Limit Information 86
Speed limit in the com‐
puter 89
Split screen 23
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic
Driving Control 120
Sport automatic transmis‐
sion 75
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 90
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 120
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 74
Sport steering, variable 119
Stability control systems 118
Start/Stop button 65
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 37
Starting the combustion en‐
gine 67
Status display, tires 100
Status information, iDrive 22
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Steering wheel, adjusting 60
Steering wheel heating 60
Steptronic, automatic trans‐
mission 73
Storage compartments 160
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 160
Storage, tires 191
Storing the vehicle 220
Summer tires, tread 189
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 79
Surround View 134
Switch for Dynamic Driv‐
ing 120
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 149
Switch, refer to Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 80
Tailgate 42
Tailgate opening with no-
touch activation 44
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 40
Tail lamps 206
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7
Technical data 224
Telephone, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 147
Temperature display, external
temperature 81
Temperature, engine oil 80
Tempomat, refer to Active
Cruise Control 123
Terminal, starting aid 213
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 79
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 46
Theft protection, refer to
Central locking system 39
Thigh support 53
Through-loading system 158
Tilt alarm sensor 47
Time of arrival 89
Tire damage 189
Tire identification marks 187
Tire inflation pressure 185
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, refer to FTM 103
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 100
Tires, changing 189
Seite 235
Everything from A to Z Reference
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 185
Tires, run-flat tires 191
Tire tread 189
Tone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tools 200
Top View 138
Total vehicle weight 225
Touchpad 21
Tow fitting 215
Towing 214
Tow-starting 214
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 100
Traction control 119
TRACTION program, Dy‐
namic Driving Control 119
Transmission, automatic 73
Transporting children
safely 61
Tread, tires 189
Trip computer 89
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 70
Trip odometer 81
Trunk lid 42
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
ing 43
Trunk lid, hotel function 43
Trunk lid opening with no-
touch activation 44
Trunk lid via remote con‐
trol 40
Turning circle 225
Turning circle lines, rearview
camera 135
Turn signals, operation 70
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 206
U
Unintentional alarm 47
Units of measure 91
Universal remote control 152
Unlock button, automatic
transmission 74
Unlocking/locking from in‐
side 42
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 41
Unlocking/locking with re‐
mote control 40
Unlocking, settings 45
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 219
USB interface 157
V
Variable sport steering 119
Vehicle battery 208
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 209
Vehicle, breaking in 166
Vehicle care 218
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification num‐
ber in the engine compart‐
ment 192
Vehicle jack 208
Vehicle paint 218
Vehicle storage 220
Vehicle wash 217
Ventilation 149
Ventilation, refer to Parked-
car ventilation 149
Voice activation system 26
W
Warning indicators 78
Warning lamps 78
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 78
Warning triangle 212
Washer fluid 73
Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐
pacity 226
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 72
Washer system 71
Washing, vehicle 217
Water, hybrid system 216
Water on roads 168
Weights 225
Welcome lamps 92
What to do after an acci‐
dent 216
Wheel base, vehicle 225
Wheel cleaner 219
Wheels, changing 189
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 185
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 103
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 100
Width, vehicle 224
Window defroster, rear 148
Windows, powered 47
Windshield washer fluid 73
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 72
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 71
Windshield wiper 71
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 72
Winter storage, care 220
Winter tires, suitable
tires 190
Winter tires, tread 189
Wiper blades, replacing 200
Wiper fluid 73
Wiper system 71
Wood, care 219
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 25
Working on the hybrid sys‐
tem 215
Wrench 200
Seite 236
Reference Everything from A to Z
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 40 2 911 091 ue
*BL291109100D*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 091 - VI/13
